Online help

TruTops CAD
Use the subject-index, the bookmark, or the Adobe Reader
functions to search for a key word.
Information about Adobe Reader
x
x
x
x

Online help

In Adobe Reader, you can find the "Search" function under

Edit.
The "Search" function can also be activated by clicking the
binoculars in the icon bar.
"Continue search" can be activated using the F3 key.
You can use the arrow button in the icon bar as well as the
bookmark to navigate through the document.

Technical telegram
02/2009

TruTops
New in Version 2.0

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. K, Technische Dokumentation

Johann-Maus-Strae, D-71254 Ditzingen
Phone: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-, Fax: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-5 40
Internet: www.trumpf.com
E-Mail: [email protected]

1.

TruTops

1.1

Determining gas and energy

consumption per part

Values are now output in the table leader of the NC program

(CONSUMPTION_TIMES table). They can be used to determine
the gas and energy consumption per part with calculation
programs such as TruTops Calculate.
Your advantages

The output values are broken down according to part.

Order costs can be calculated more simply and precisely.
The service life of tools can be forecast using the consumption
data.

2.

TruTops CAD

2.1

Generate profiles quickly and easily

Until now, the profile editor in TruTops Bend could only generate
profiles in TruTops Bend. Now all TruTops customers can use the
profile editor. With it, profiles can be generated easily and quickly.
Saved profiles can be opened and modified without difficulty. If the
sheet thickness is changed, for example, the profile is adapted
automatically.

2.2

Catching virtual corners

Original points of a corner (virtual corners), that have been

grasped, rounded off or notched, are caught. The centre of a notch
is also considered a virtual corner. A small "v" on the cursor
indicates that a virtual corner has been caught.

0BTruTops

TT138EN.DOC

3.

TruTops Laser

3.1

Machining nesting jobs

The procedure for machining a nesting job has been changed:

Sheet changes occur quickly now without the need for saving.
Machinings on the parts of a sheet are automatically copied to
the same parts on other sheets of the order.
Some functions can also be performed for the entire order,
such as creating machinings, creating part groups for parts
with identical angular positions and creating NC programs.

3.2

Saving sheet skeleton as remainder

sheet

During NC program generation, the sheet skeleton can be saved

as *.TRG (remainder sheet) depending on the waste of the sheet
and entered in the remainder sheet management (also applies for
TruTops Punch).
In the "Generate NC program" screen, check the Use sheet
skeleton as remainder sheet if waste greater than checkbox and
enter the waste permitted as a percentage.

Example of a remainder sheet

TT138EN.DOC

Fig. 55550

2BTruTops Laser

3.3

TwinLine in thick sheet (mild steel)

With the help of a new corner treatment, corners in mild steel can
be cut without rounding. That allows TwinLine preparation for thick
mild steel (> 6 mm) as well. This corner treatment is now
automatically generated for TwinLine.
To do this, the speed is reduced before the corners and the
corners are cooled. The reduced paths and cooled point are
displayed in yellow.
The "Corner cooling" strategy is used exclusively with thick sheets.
The way to machine the corners is specified in the rules (see
>Extras >Change data >Rules >General 3 "TwinLine with
Cooling").

2BTruTops Laser

TT138EN.DOC

4.

TruTops Punch

4.1

Auxiliary axes, laser cutting head

Until now, the TruMatic 7000 is the only machine that has 2
additional axles to traverse the laser cutting head. These auxiliary
axes can be moved independently from or in interplay with the
axles of the machine table (table axis).

Changing the position of the of the auxiliary

axes
Before a contour is machined, the auxiliary axes can be moved to
defined positions.
Applications

Machinings in reduced clamp dead area.

Reliable part removal via the flap.
Reliable part removal via the laser die.

The optimal position of the auxiliary axes for disposing of a part is

automatically calculated by TruTops Punch but it can also be
manually adjusted.
Example: Machining in
reduced clamp dead area

Reduced clamp dead area

machining with auxiliary axes

Machining in reduced clamp

dead area

possible
2

Remaining clamp dead area

no machining possible
Fig. 54731

TT138EN.DOC

3BTruTops Punch

Removing with FinalCut

With FinalCut, the auxiliary axes cut one or more parts free while
the table axes are at rest.
Advantages

The sheet cannot shift during free cutting.

Several parts can also be removed simultaneously.

Part removal with FinalCut can be set in TruTops Punch for each
contour that is machined with a laser.
FinalCut also makes it possible to remove several parts at the
same time.

Contour 1

Contour 2

FinalCut for several parts in

TruTops

Removing with FinalCut

3BTruTops Punch

Fig. 54730

TT138EN.DOC

4.2

Generating chamfered laser edges

Until now, 2 steps were necessary for generating a chamfered

laser edge: the contour was first machined with a roller pinching
tool and then with the laser.
TruTops Punch unites the two steps in one function.

Generating chamfered laser edges

TT138EN.DOC

Fig. 54728

3BTruTops Punch

4.3

Pushing out parts

Parts that will be cut free with the laser can be given a microjoint
and then removed with an extraction tool in one step.
TruTops Punch automatically positions the extraction tool at the
optimal location.
Example

Lettering is machined with the laser. The waste parts (letters) are
pushed out with the extraction tool and disposed of reliably.

4.4

Processing samples

The TruTops Punch options for creating and applying processing

samples were extended:

Partial contours can also be used as a reference point for

processing samples.
Processing samples can be selected and applied for individual
contours.

Using processing samples for individual contours

3BTruTops Punch

Fig. 54732

TT138EN.DOC

5.

TruTops Tube

5.1

New application: 3D tube construction

With 3D tube construction, a complex construction can be quickly

created from several individual tubes. Parameters such as length,
width, height, material thickness and distances from holes can be
adapted easily.
BASIC FUNCTIONS

Options

Tubes can be cut to the required angle effortlessly.

Models can be easily modified (even after the fact).

All data are connected to the TruTops Tube database.

It is possible to import and unfold tube models in the IGES,

STEP, SAT, SLDPRT and SLDASM formats.

Positioning aids and peg and bayonet connections can be

created automatically.

3D tube construction

TT138EN.DOC

Fig. 54910

4BTruTops Tube

6.

New application: TruTops Bend

With TruTops Bend, a 2D drawing turns into an NC program for

your press brake. All process steps are simulated in 3D and
monitored with a collision check.
BASIC FUNCTIONS

A database with machine data, tools, materials and bend

allowances is connected.

The bending sequence is automatically calculated and

optimised.

Tools can be loaded based on tool lists. A setup plan is

created.

The bending process is automatically programmed and

simulated in 3D. A collision determination is performed at the
same time.

The NC program can be processed directly on the machine

without a refinishing operation.

Fig. 55532

Options

BendMaster:
The BendMaster programming is simulated in 3D. A
collision determination is performed at the same time.

Various unloading stacks can be programmed for pallets,

crates or conveyor belts.

Suction cup, multi, magnet and pivoted-jaw grippers can

be programmed.

All gripping positions are calculated automatically. Different

strategies for grip changes can be selected.

The travelling motion is calculated automatically.

10

5BNew application: TruTops Bend

TT138EN.DOC

TT138EN.DOC

With the Autorun function, several parts can be automatically

programmed during the night.
With SheetAdvisor, programs from the Bend application can be
transferred to 3D construction program.
With Bend Calculation, handling periods for individual
programs can be calculated.
EHT Converter converts the programs from the Bend
application for machines with the Cybelec control system.

5BNew application: TruTops Bend

11

12

5BNew application: TruTops Bend

TT138EN.DOC

Software manual

TruTops CAD
Version 4.0

Software manual

TruTops CAD
Version 4.0

Edition 2007-04-20

Order Information

Please specify when ordering this document:

Software manual
TruTops CAD
Edition 2007-04-20
Document number S523EN

Address for orders

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG

Technische Dokumentation
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
D-71254 Ditzingen
Fon: +49 (0) 71 56 /3 03-0
Fax: +49 (0) 71 56 /3 03-5 40
Internet: http//www.trumpf.com
E-Mail: [email protected]

This document was compiled by the Technical Documentation Dept. of

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG.
All rights, in particular the right to reproduce, distribute or translate this
documentation, are reserved to TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH +
Co. KG, even in case of patent and industrial rights applications. No part of this
documentation may be reproduced, processed, duplicated or distributed by
means of electronic systems in any form whatsoever without the prior written
consent of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Subject to errors
and technical changes.
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG cannot be held responsible
for possible mistakes in this documentation. Any warranty for direct and
indirect damages, arising in connection with the delivery or the use of this
documentation, is excluded, as far as this is in conformity with the law.

Table of contents
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6
1.7

1.8

1.9

S523EN

2007-04-20

Basics .............................................................................. 16
Starting and exiting TruToPs ............................................ 16
Starting TruTops .......................................................... 16
Exiting TruTops................................................................. 16
Online help, software version, tips and tricks from
the Internet........................................................................ 17
Calling up online help .................................................. 17
Obtaining tips and tricks directly from the
Internet......................................................................... 17
Displaying software version......................................... 17
Applications in TruTops .................................................... 18
Closing applications individually and reopening.......... 18
Opening applications severally ("copy") ...................... 19
Closing application permanently ("delete").................. 19
Renaming application .................................................. 19
Switching language of all applications......................... 20
Programming "Simple drawing" and "Simple
programming" modules..................................................... 21
Opening "Simple drawing"........................................... 21
Opening "Simple programming" .................................. 21
User-defined settings........................................................ 22
Copying and transferring user-defined settings........... 22
Menus, function browsers and toolbars............................ 24
Displaying and hiding the function browser................. 27
Displaying and hiding button texts in the
function browser .......................................................... 27
Displaying and hiding quick navigation bar ................. 27
Displaying and hiding toolbars..................................... 28
Moving or downsizing toolbars .................................... 28
Modifying existing toolbars, creating own
toolbars ........................................................................ 29
Renaming the toolbar .................................................. 29
Deleting a toolbar......................................................... 30
Resetting toolbars to their original status .................... 30
Modifying the size of the symbols................................ 30
TruTops with PDM (Product Data Management) ............. 31
What is PDM?.............................................................. 31
TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM a
comparison .................................................................. 32
Calling up PDM functions via command
prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe) ............................................ 33
Calling up help for pdmCLI.exe ................................... 33
Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe ........................................ 35

Table of contents

1.10

1.11

1.12

1.13

1.14

1.15

1.16
1.17
1.18

2.

Table of contents

Characteristics: a property of elements and

contours ............................................................................ 38
Switching "Characteristic fixed" on or off TruTops behavior......................................................... 38
Notches: Advanced options through the
"Characteristic" property .............................................. 40
Screen display .................................................................. 41
Adapting window size .................................................. 41
Modifying color scheme............................................... 41
Moving masks and messages on the interface ........... 41
Display of drawings........................................................... 42
Restructuring display of drawings................................ 42
Displaying drawing completely .................................... 42
Displaying detail view .................................................. 42
Moving screen section................................................. 43
Zooming drawing ......................................................... 43
Get last view ................................................................ 44
Memorizing and recalling view .................................... 44
Displaying and hiding outline points ............................ 44
Operating TruToPs with the mouse.................................. 45
Placing the mouse pointer in masks
automatically at OK ..................................................... 45
Operating TruTops using keyboard .................................. 46
Using Windows keyboard commands and
shortcuts ...................................................................... 46
Entering numerical values and coordinates ................ 46
Entering texts in input fields......................................... 46
Using key functions of TruTops ................................... 47
Using "Copy" "Paste"................................................ 48
Using keyboard buffer of the command line
(repeating entries)........................................................ 48
Calculator.......................................................................... 49
Deactivating calculator permanently............................ 49
Entering numerical values in input fields ..................... 50
Entering X and Y coordinates of points ....................... 50
Searching with the help of place holders
(wildcards)......................................................................... 51
TruTops license ................................................................ 52
Using TruTops with a limited period license................ 52
Printing.............................................................................. 53
Printing the textual content of the files ........................ 53
Printing screen content................................................ 53
Printing Geos as HPGL ............................................... 54
Setting basic data ........................................................... 55

2007-04-20

S523EN

3.
3.1

3.2
3.3

3.4
3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

S523EN

2007-04-20

Opening and saving files ............................................... 56

TruTops file browser ......................................................... 56
Opening the TruTops file browser ............................... 57
Creating new folders.................................................... 58
Deleting folders............................................................ 58
Renaming files or folders............................................. 59
Deleting and restoring files, emptying the
recycle bin (PDM) ........................................................ 60
Searching for files ........................................................ 62
Adding other details to the list field of the files ............ 63
Opening files with the Geo Viewer .............................. 64
Sending files via email................................................. 64
Zipping files.................................................................. 65
Sending files from PDM to "My Documents" in
the file system.............................................................. 65
File properties ................................................................... 66
Viewing file properties ................................................. 66
Importing/exporting files and folders (PDM) ..................... 67
Importing/exporting files using Windows
Explorer (PDM) ............................................................ 67
Importing files and single folders using the file
browser (PDM)............................................................. 68
Importing several folders in a single job step
(PDM) .......................................................................... 69
Exporting files using the TruTops file browser
(PDM) .......................................................................... 70
Importing/exporting files using the prompt/script
(PDM) .......................................................................... 71
Dependencies between files............................................. 72
Checking dependencies between files (PDM)............. 72
Updated status of the files ................................................ 74
Checking the updated status of the files
automatically when loading and saving in
TruTops (PDM) ............................................................ 74
Saving TruTops CAD files ................................................ 75
Saving drawings as a workfile ..................................... 75
Saving drawing as GEO .............................................. 76
Entering drawing data.................................................. 77
Saving drawings as DXF ............................................. 78
Saving geometry templates as VLG for single
holes, rows of holes and circles of holes..................... 79
Saving punching or bending tools as WZG ................. 80
Opening TruTops CAD files.............................................. 81
Opening workfile .......................................................... 81
Opening TruTops files ................................................. 81
Opening foreign formats from CAD systems .................... 81

Table of contents

3.9

4.
4.1

4.2

Table of contents

Loading 2D drawings in the DXF, DWG, IGS or

MI format...................................................................... 82
Defining loading options for 2D drawings in DXF
or DWG format............................................................. 83
Defining loading options for 2D drawings in the
IGS format ................................................................... 87
Defining loading options for 2D drawings in the
MI format...................................................................... 90
Extracting parts and sheets from foreign formats
(assistant for layout) ......................................................... 95
Extracting parts from drawings in foreign format
and saving as GEO ..................................................... 95
Extracting parts from drawings in foreign format
and saving as sheet..................................................... 96
Using auxiliary tools....................................................... 99
Drawing auxiliary lines ...................................................... 99
Drawing auxiliary line through 2 points........................ 99
Drawing an auxiliary line parallel to the existing
auxiliary line ................................................................. 99
Drawing horizontal or vertical auxiliary lines ............. 100
Drawing an auxiliary line as a tangent at the arc
element and point ...................................................... 100
Drawing an auxiliary line at right angles to an
element ...................................................................... 101
Drawing an auxiliary line through point and
angle of inclination ..................................................... 101
Drawing an auxiliary line through point and
angle to the base line ................................................ 102
Drawing an auxiliary line through tangent at 2
arc elements .............................................................. 102
Dividing an element with an auxiliary line.................. 103
Drawing auxiliary circle ................................................... 104
Drawing an auxiliary circle through three points........ 104
Drawing auxiliary circle through center and
radius ......................................................................... 104
Drawing auxiliary circle through diameter ................. 105
Drawing auxiliary circle through center and
diameter..................................................................... 105
Drawing concentric auxiliary circles........................... 106
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to two
elements .................................................................... 106
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to an element
and two points............................................................ 107
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to three
elements .................................................................... 107

2007-04-20

S523EN

4.3
4.4

4.5

5.
5.1
5.2

5.3

5.4
5.5
5.6

S523EN

2007-04-20

Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to an element ...... 108

Auxiliary geometry .......................................................... 109
Deleting auxiliary geometry ....................................... 109
Measuring ....................................................................... 110
Measuring the distance between 2 points ................. 110
Measuring coordinates of a point .............................. 110
Measuring horizontal or vertical distance
between 2 points........................................................ 110
Measuring coordinates, radius and diameter of
a circle ....................................................................... 110
Measuring angle ........................................................ 110
Measuring length ....................................................... 111
Zero point of the coordinate system ............................... 111
Displacing zero point ................................................. 111
Drawing geometries ..................................................... 112
Drawing points ................................................................ 112
Drawing points ........................................................... 112
Drawing lines .................................................................. 113
Drawing lines through two points............................... 113
Drawing a line parallel to the existing line ................. 113
Drawing horizontal or vertical lines............................ 114
Drawing a line as a tangent at an arc element
and point .................................................................... 114
Drawing a line at right angles to another
element ...................................................................... 114
Drawing a line with point, angle of inclination
and length .................................................................. 115
Drawing a line through a tangent at two arc
elements .................................................................... 115
Drawing circles ............................................................... 116
Drawing a circle through three points ........................ 116
Drawing a circle through center and radius............... 116
Drawing a circle through diameter............................. 117
Drawing a circle through center and diameter........... 117
Drawing a circle tangential to two elements .............. 118
Drawing concentric circles......................................... 118
Drawing polygons ........................................................... 119
Drawing polygons ...................................................... 119
Drawing rectangles ......................................................... 119
Drawing rectangles .................................................... 119
Drawing arcs ................................................................... 120
Drawing arcs through three points............................. 120
Drawing arcs through center, start and end point ..... 120
Drawing arcs through diameter ................................. 121
Drawing concentric arcs ............................................ 121

Table of contents

5.7

5.8

5.9

5.10
5.11

6.

6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7

Machining several outer contours .............................. 149

Displaying outer contours ............................................... 149
Displaying the first outer contour .................................... 149
Going to the next outer contour ...................................... 150
Highlighting the outer contour......................................... 150
Marking outer contour..................................................... 150
Deleting contour.............................................................. 150
Selecting the outer contour............................................. 151

6.2
6.3

Table of contents

Creating single holes, circles of holes and rows

of holes (macros).......................................................... 135
Defining a circle, ellipse or dot mark point as base
element ........................................................................... 136
Defining rectangle or oblong hole as base element ....... 138
Defining your own geometry templates as base
element ........................................................................... 139
Defining a forming tool as base element ........................ 140
Defining tool drawing as base element........................... 142
Creating single hole through macro................................ 143
Creating a circle of holes through macro........................ 144
Creating a row of holes through macro .......................... 145
Creating a hole grid through macro ................................ 146
Creating any bend relief through macro ......................... 147
Deleting duplicate single holes ....................................... 147

6.1

10

Drawing an arc through center, radius, start and

end angle ................................................................... 122
Drawing multicurve contour ....................................... 122
Converting arcs into roundings.................................. 123
Drawing notches ............................................................. 124
Creating corner notch with various distances............ 125
Creating corner notch with same distances .............. 126
Creating X/Y element notches................................... 127
Creating acute angle element notches...................... 128
Creating bend relief later ........................................... 128
Drawing bevels ............................................................... 129
Drawing bevel with distance to the vertex ................. 129
Drawing bevel through vertex.................................... 130
Rounding corners ........................................................... 131
Rounding corners ...................................................... 131
Recreate corners ....................................................... 131
Drawing equidistants ...................................................... 132
Drawing equidistant to the contour ............................ 132
Tracing auxiliary geometry.............................................. 133
Tracing auxiliary geometry ........................................ 133

2007-04-20

S523EN

8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8

Deleting.......................................................................... 152
Deleting single elements or contours ............................. 152
Deleting elements with certain line properties ................ 152
Deleting small contours .................................................. 153
Deleting short elements .................................................. 153
Deleting characteristics................................................... 153
Deleting dimensioning .................................................... 154
Deleting duplicate single holes ....................................... 154
Deleting auxiliary geometries.......................................... 155

9.
9.1
9.2

Element groups............................................................. 156

Forming element groups................................................. 156
Dissolving element groups.............................................. 156

10.
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5

Marking and shading.................................................... 157

Setting marking............................................................... 157
Deleting marking............................................................. 157
Shading closed contours ................................................ 158
Modify hatching............................................................... 159
Deleting hatch................................................................. 159

11.
11.1

Modifying drawn geometries ....................................... 160

Moving geometries ......................................................... 160
Moving geometries horizontally or vertically.............. 160
Moving geometries through two points...................... 161
Rotating geometries........................................................ 162
Rotating geometries by a center................................ 162
Rotating geometries by two points ............................ 163
Modifying scale of geometries ........................................ 164
Modifying scale of geometries at a center................. 164
Scale modification of geometries through two
points ......................................................................... 165
Mirroring geometries....................................................... 166
Mirroring geometries on a horizontal or vertical
mirror line................................................................... 166
Mirroring geometries on a symmetry point ................ 167
Mirroring geometries on a random axis..................... 168
Stretching geometries..................................................... 169
Stretching geometry horizontally or vertically............ 169
Stretching geometry with 2 points ............................. 169
Modifying line attributes (color and line type) ................. 170
Presetting line color and line type.............................. 170
Modifying line color/line type of individual
existing elements ....................................................... 170
Modifying lines of one color and/or line type
simultaneously ........................................................... 171

11.2

11.3

11.4

11.5

11.6

S523EN

2007-04-20

Table of contents

11

11.7

Modifying radii and diameters of roundings or

circles.............................................................................. 172
Modifying rounding radius ......................................... 172
Modifying diameter of circles ..................................... 172

12.
12.1

Clearing geometries ..................................................... 173

Splitting or combining elements...................................... 173
Separating an element .............................................. 173
Separating two elements at their intersection ........... 174
Combining elements .................................................. 174
Shortening or extending elements.................................. 176
Shortening or extending an element.......................... 176
Shortening or extending two elements ...................... 177
Smoothing elements or contours.................................... 180
Smoothing elements or contours............................... 180
Converting narrow contours into lines ............................ 182
Converting rectangles or oblong holes into lines....... 182
Scaling diameter of circles.............................................. 183
Scaling diameter of circles......................................... 183
Open contours ................................................................ 183
Closing open contours............................................... 183
Merging contours ............................................................ 184
Merging contours ....................................................... 184
Converting lines .............................................................. 184
Converting lines into bevels....................................... 184

12.2

12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8

12

Table of contents

13.
13.1
13.2
13.3

Pasting or modifying texts in geometries .................. 185

Entering text and defining parameters............................ 185
Modifying text parameters .............................................. 187
Creating your own font.................................................... 188

14.
14.1
14.2

Embossed texts ............................................................ 191

Creating embossed texts ................................................ 191
Using special characters................................................. 192

15.

Generating geometries in different variants

15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8

(optional)........................................................................ 193
Starting/ending variant module....................................... 194
Creating variants............................................................. 195
Undoing variants............................................................. 197
Executing variants .......................................................... 197
Selecting overview of variants ........................................ 197
Allocating a variant to an element or a bending ............. 198
Adopting element selection of an existing variant .......... 198
Example .......................................................................... 199

2007-04-20

S523EN

16.
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7

Working with variables and reference elements ....... 201

Creating and processing variables ................................. 201
Importing variables ......................................................... 203
Exporting variables ......................................................... 203
Deleting variables ........................................................... 203
Setting reference element............................................... 204
Removing a reference element....................................... 204
Showing reference element ............................................ 205

17.
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
17.9
17.10

Managing variants ........................................................ 206

Positioning variants......................................................... 206
Creating new variants ..................................................... 206
Copying variants ............................................................. 206
Modifying variants........................................................... 206
Deleting variants ............................................................. 207
Executing variants several times .................................... 207
Saving geometry with variant as *.GMV ......................... 208
Exporting variant as *.GEO............................................. 208
Exporting variants to Excel ............................................. 209
Importing variants from Excel ......................................... 211

18.

Comparing geometries with one another

18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4

S523EN

2007-04-20

(geometry comparator) ................................................ 212

Opening and closing geometry comparator.................... 212
Comparing a reference drawing and a comparison
drawing with one another................................................ 213
Merging a reference drawing with a comparison
drawing ........................................................................... 214
Deleting a reference drawing or a comparison
drawing ........................................................................... 214

19.
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7
19.8
19.9

Dimensioning geometries............................................ 215

Showing and hiding dimensionings ................................ 215
Dimensioning lines.......................................................... 215
Dimensioning circles, radii, arc lengths .......................... 217
Dimensioning an angle ................................................... 218
Moving dimensioning ...................................................... 218
Adapting dimensioning text............................................. 219
Setting the dimensioning format ..................................... 220
Deleting dimensioning .................................................... 220
Setting standard text size ............................................... 221

20.
20.1
20.2

Preparing geometries for machining.......................... 222

Loading and preparing geometries................................. 222
Changing the processing sequence of prepared
geometries ...................................................................... 223

Table of contents

13

20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.8

Modifying start points for machining ............................... 224

Selecting preferred direction........................................... 225
Defining contour start...................................................... 225
Preferring contours ......................................................... 226
Recalculating preparation ............................................... 226
Saving a prepared geometry .......................................... 226

21.
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.5
21.6
21.7
21.8
21.9
21.10

Bending lines ................................................................ 228

Creating bending lines .................................................... 228
Allocating bending information ....................................... 229
Modifying bending lines .................................................. 229
Marking bending lines..................................................... 229
Adopting bending tools ................................................... 230
Unfolding bending profile ................................................ 230
Creating a bending profile............................................... 231
Creating a profile as auxiliary geometry ......................... 232
Creating bumping (round bending)................................. 232
Showing material ............................................................ 233

22.
22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4

Creating profiles ........................................................... 234

Creating .......................................................................... 234
Creating line through XY................................................. 234
Creating bumping ........................................................... 235
Creating folding............................................................... 236

23.
23.1
23.2
23.3
23.4
23.5
23.6
23.7

Drawing a bending tool ................................................ 238

Drawing a normal upper tool........................................... 238
Drawing a normal lower tool ........................................... 239
Drawing holder................................................................ 241
Drawing a Z tool.............................................................. 241
Drawing an adapter ........................................................ 242
Drawing front view of a horn tool .................................... 242
Modifying tool.................................................................. 243

Index ........................................................................................ 245

14

Table of contents

2007-04-20

S523EN

S523EN

2007-04-20

15

1.

Basics

1.1

Starting and exiting TruToPs

Starting TruTops
Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >TruTops.

1.2

Exiting TruTops

Select Exit TruTops

16

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

1.3

Online help, software version, tips and

tricks from the Internet

Calling up online help

Displaying the software
manual
Displaying readme

1. Select >Help >Help or press the <F1> key.

The software manual of the relevant application (CAD, Nest,
Laser, Punch...) opens (.pdf-file with bookmarks).
2. Select >Help >Readme.

Obtaining tips and tricks directly from the

Internet
TruTops offers the option of accessing the Internet and thus the
TRUMPF homepage directly. The homepage among other things
has tips and tricks for programming and useful information about
the product.
Select >Help >TruTops on the Internet.
Internet Explorer with the CAD/CAM info service is started.

Displaying software version

1. Select >Help >Info....
The "Version" mask is displayed.
2. Select the "Version" tab.

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

17

1.4

Applications in TruTops

After the installation of TruTops, every application is separately

available as a separate "tab".
Every application can be opened several times, closed and
reopened individually, closed permanently ("delete"), renamed
individually or moved.
All individual modifications (including modifications to the interface,
such as background color, adapted toolbars ...) are saved
user-specifically and are loaded automatically when opening
TruTops.
Applications currently available in TruTops:
TruTops CAD: drawing parts or loading them from other CAD
systems, setting basic data (e.g. material).
Nest: nesting parts, setting basic data (e.g. material).
TruTops Laser: defining laser processing, setting basic data for
the laser processing (e.g. slat layout, Cateye ...).
TruTops Punch:
defining
punching
or
multi-purpose
processing, setting basis data for the punching or
multi-purpose processing (e.g. clamp data, repositioning
cylinders ...).

Closing applications individually and

reopening
Note
If an application is closed, the individual user settings of the
application are retained.
Closing application

Reopen application?

18

0BBasics

1. Right click on the tab of the application to be closed.

The context menu is displayed.
2. Select >Close.
3. Right click on the tab of any open application.
The context menu is displayed.
4. Select >Open.
5. Select application to be opened.

2007-04-20

S523EN

Opening applications severally ("copy")

1. Right click on the tab of any application.
The context menu is displayed.
2. Select >New.
All available applications are displayed in another submenu.
3. Mark the application that is to be opened once more (i.e.
copied).
The copied application is opened. The name is extended by an
additive.

Closing application permanently ("delete")

Notes
If an application is closed permanently, it is no longer opened
automatically when TruTops is started. The individual user
settings are lost.
The application can be reopened using the context menu (right
click on the tab of any open application, select >New).
1. Right click on the tab of the application to be closed
permanently.
The context menu is displayed.
2. Select >Delete.

Renaming application
1. Right click on the tab of the desired application.
The context menu is displayed.
2. Select >Rename.
3. Enter the new name of the application.
4. Select OK.

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

19

Switching language of all applications

1. Select Languages
.
The "Language selection" mask is displayed.
2. Select the desired language.
Note
In the Korean, Chinese, Japanese, Polish and Russian
languages, observe the operating system on which TruTops
has been installed.
Example:
"Korean": For Korean operating system.
"Korean (West)": For western operating system.
3. Select OK.
The new language becomes effective the next time TruTops is
started.

20

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

1.5

Programming "Simple drawing" and

"Simple programming" modules

The vast majority of all workpieces are single parts. The "Simple
drawing" modules in "CAD" and the "Simple programming"
modules in "Punch" offer just the scope of functionality that is
required for the simple workpieces.
From drawing the workpiece to the reliable NC program - the
user-guided graphical interface guides you safely and quickly
through the program. The design of the user interface enables
operation through touching or completely using the keyboard.
The functions of the "Simple drawing" and "Simple programming"
modules are described in the " TruTops software manual for simple
drawing and simple programming".

Opening "Simple drawing"

Select (in "CAD") >Tools >Simple drawing.

Opening "Simple programming"

Select (in "Punch") >Tools >Simple programming.

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

21

1.6

User-defined settings

Copying and transferring user-defined

settings
User-defined settings (e.g. type and number of applications that
are opened, personal interface settings in the single applications)
can be copied and transferred as follows:
Copy settings of a user and provide them to another user.
Transfer the settings of a user from one workstation (computer)
to another workstation (computer).
Copy interface settings of an application (e.g. of "CAD 1" ) and
transfer them to the "CAD 2" application (on the same
computer).
Conditions
Administrator rights and copyrights are required in all user
folders in order to copy the user-defined settings.
User-defined settings of TruTops can be copied and
transferred to another computer only for the same user.
1. Select
>Start
>Programs
>TRUMPF.NET
>TruTops
Administration >TruTops Config.
The Microsoft Windows Explorer is started. The folder in which
the user settings are saved is displayed automatically.
Example: English operating system with "millerha" as user
path 'C:\Documents and Settings\millerha\Application
Data\TRUMPF'" is opened.
The 'TRUMPF' folder has one subfolder for TruTops and one
more for every application. In addition, the data is stored as per
the product versions.
2. Either
To transfer the settings to another computer: copy the
entire 'TRUMPF' folder and paste it in the appropriate
folder on another computer.
or
To provide the settings to another user on the same
computer: copy the entire 'TRUMPF' folder and store it in
the intermediate storage at a suitable location.

22

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

Log in another user on to the computer.

Paste the entire 'TRUMPF' folder in the appropriate folder
of another user.

or
To copy (e.g.) the settings of the "CAD 1" application and
transfer them to "CAD 2" application: copy the 'x.usr' file in
the folder of the "CAD 1" application and paste it in the
folder of the "CAD 2" application.

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

23

1.7

Voice switchover

Menus, function browsers and toolbars

Main menu bar with main menu

Status bar and message line

Command and input line (can be

and submenus
2

Application

Function browser

moved to the desired position

using the sizing tool)
3

Toolbars (can be customized,

Exiting TruTops

Command block

can be moved to the desired

position using the sizing tool)
TruTops user interface (here: CAD application is open)

Main menus and submenus

24

0BBasics

Fig. 50209

The main menus and submenus contain all functions available in

the relevant application (CAD, Nest, Laser, Punch ...).

2007-04-20

S523EN

Function browser

Function category

(corresponding to an entry in the

Pin, pressed (function group is

permanently open)

main menu)
2

Function group (corresponding

to a submenu)

Pin, open (function group is

closed as soon as another one
is opened)

Multi-function button

Button text (can be displayed

and hidden)

Quick navigation bar (can be

Scrolling with the wheel mouse

displayed and hidden)

Function browser

Fig. 50208

The
function
browser
contains
the
most
important
(TruTops-specific) functions. The function browser is subdivided
into separate function categories (e.g. "Modify"). The function
categories are further divided into function groups (e.g. "Move").
The function browser can be dragged to the desired width.
Frequently used function groups within a function category can be
"pinned", i.e. can be opened permanently.

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

25

Multi-function buttons

Some of the buttons in the function browser function as

multi-function buttons or options buttons.
Multi-function buttons are marked with a triangle in the bottom
right. They display their current function in the function browser.
The current function can be changed with a right click (submenu).
Options buttons switch functions on or off.

Multi-function button

Options button

Displays the current function

Green: Function is activated.

(here: create 1 copy and move

Gray: Function is deactivated

by 2 points)
Multi-function buttons, Options buttons

Toolbars

Status bar and message line

Toolbars allow quick access to the most important functions.

Depending on the user, they can be created individually, can be
added to commands, can be moved and downsized. The toolbars
can thus be adapted to typical programming tasks at any time.

Command line and input line

26

0BBasics

Fig. 50212

The current X and Y position of the mouse pointer is displayed

in the status bar (including the measuring unit).
The message line displays the ongoing action. Examples:

Reading of file.... finished

Drawing deleted!
The command line gives instructions about what is to be done.
Examples:

Enter first point

Identify object to be rearranged

Mark element or click on "OK"

The required data can be entered in the input line. Each entry
must be confirmed with the enter key ( ). Examples of entries:

X and Y coordinates of points.

Angle.

2007-04-20

S523EN

Displaying and hiding the function browser

Activate or deactivate >View >Toolbars >Function browser.

Displaying and hiding button texts in the

function browser
The button texts in the function browser can be hidden and
displayed again.
If the button texts are hidden, one can only work with icons and
tool tips.
1. Either
Select >Tools >Options....
or
Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....
Select the "Options" tab.
2. Activate or deactivate "Show icon and text".
3. Select Close.

Displaying and hiding quick navigation bar

Function groups can be opened very quickly with the quick
navigation bar (4) (see "Fig. 50208", pg. 25).
1. Either
Select >Tools >Options....
or
Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....
Select the "Options" tab.
2. Activate or deactivate "Show Quick navigation bar".
3. Select Close.

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

27

Displaying and hiding toolbars

Sizing tool

Button

"File" icon bar

Fig. 50210

1. Select >View >Toolbars.

2. Activate or deactivate the desired toolbars.

Moving or downsizing toolbars

Moving toolbars

1. Using the mouse, move the toolbar to the desired position with
the sizing tool (= vertical lines on the left side).

Downsizing toolbars

2. To downsize the toolbar on the left: use the mouse to move the
toolbar with the sizing tool (= vertical lines on the left side) to
the left until the toolbar on the left is downsized.
or
Using the mouse, move the toolbar with the sizing tool
(= vertical lines on the left side) to the right until the toolbar
is downsized.
Two arrows are displayed on the right side of the downsized
toolbar (>>).

Arrows to select the hidden functions

Minimized "File" icon bar

Fig. 50211

3. To select the functions that are (now) hidden: click > > and
select the desired function.

28

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

Modifying existing toolbars, creating own

toolbars
In addition to the already existing toolbars, the user can create his
own toolbars and equip them with the required buttons.
Alternatively, unnecessary buttons can be deleted and missing
buttons can be added to the existing toolbars.
Creating a toolbar

Adding a button to the

toolbar

Removing a button again?

1. Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....

2. In the "Toolbars" tab, select New.
3. Enter the name of the user-defined toolbar and select OK.
The toolbar that is (still) empty is automatically displayed under
the main menu bar.
4. Select the "Commands" tab.
5. In the "Categories" field, click on the desired category.
6. Drag the desired command from the "Commands" field to the
new toolbar.
7. After creating all the desired toolbars, select Close.
8. If the "Adapt" mask is no longer open: select >View >Toolbars
>Adapt... again.
9. Drag the buttons to be removed with the mouse out of the
toolbar and drop them.

Renaming the toolbar

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

S523EN

2007-04-20

Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....

In the "Toolbars" tab, mark the toolbar to be renamed.
Select Rename.
Enter the new name of the toolbar and select OK.
Select Close.

0BBasics

29

Deleting a toolbar
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....

In the "Toolbars" tab, mark the toolbar to be deleted.
Select Delete.
Select Close.

Resetting toolbars to their original status

All individual modifications (e.g. user-defined toolbars, moved
toolbars) are cancelled when resetting the toolbars. The originally
installed status is restored. (Exception: size of the symbols.)
1. Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....
2. In the "Toolbars" tab, select Reset....

Modifying the size of the symbols

The size of the symbols in the toolbars and the function browser
can be modified. (However, the size of the symbols in the menus
and the quick navigation bar cannot be modified.)
1. Either
Select >Tools >Options....
or
Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....
Select the "Options" tab.
2. Activate or deactivate "Large symbols".
3. Select Close.

30

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

1.8

TruTops with PDM (Product Data

Management)

What is PDM?
With the PDM Data Management, files can be saved and managed
centrally for all products.

Data Management with PDM

The advantages of PDM

Fig. 47164

S523EN

2007-04-20

PDM is a central storage location for any number of TruTops

workstations and various TruTops products.
All TruTops products work using PDM.
The dependencies between files are displayed for all products.
You can delete and export files, recognize dependencies and
view file properties with one mouse click.
You can use the new TruTops file browser to search for parts
quickly and specifically using the advanced search criteria in
PDM.
There are three options available as interfaces to older
TruTops versions and other software products which are not
PDM-compatible:

Importing and exporting files and directories via the

TruTops file browser.

Importing and exporting files and directories with the

Windows prompt or automated by means of a script.

Direct access via an enabled Windows folder or network

drive.

0BBasics

31

TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM

a comparison
Property

TruTops with
PDM

TruTops with
file system

The system checks whether the files are

up to date.

Yes

The dependencies between files are

monitored for all products.

Yes

Searching for and displaying files by

means of TruTops specific characteristics
(e.g. material) is supported.

Yes, fast

Yes, slowly

Heterogeneous data management (metric Yes

and inch) is supported.

Yes

File attributes ("Properties") created with

different character sets (European,
Japanese, ASCII) can be saved
(display in TruTops still not correct).

Yes

Comparison of TruTops with PDM and TruTops with

file system

Tab. 1

When working without the PDM, all functions of the TruTops file
browser are available.

32

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

1.9

Calling up PDM functions via

command prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)

The following PDM functions can be called up via the Windows

command prompt or can be executed in an automated manner via
script files (*.bat).
Function

Command

Comment

Exporting files/directories from a directory

Get

(see "Importing/exporting files and folders (PDM)",

pg. 67)

Importing files into a folder

Put

(see "Importing/exporting files and folders (PDM)",

pg. 67)

Deleting files from a folder

Delete

(see "Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 35)

Listing files in a folder

List

(see "Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 35)

Generating lists of attributes

ListAttributes

(see "Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 35)

Creating a new (sub) folder

Mkdir

(see "Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 35)

Deleting an empty (sub) folder

Rmdir

(see "Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 35)

Copying a file or folder into a target folder

Copy

(see "Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 35)

Moving a file or folder into a target folder

Move

(see "Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 35)

Determining file properties and

dependencies again

Rescan

(see "Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 35)

Executing commands contained in a

script file

Batch

(see "Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 35)
Tab. 2

Calling up help for pdmCLI.exe

1. Start Windows command prompt.
2. Change to the ':\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin' folder.
3. Enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe h
Help for pdmCLI.exe is displayed:

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

33

Help for pdmCLI.exe

Fig. 43561

4. To call up help for a specific command (e.g. "Put"), enter the

following command:
pdmCLI.exe h Put
Help for the specific command is displayed:

Help on the "Put" command

34

0BBasics

Fig. 43562

2007-04-20

S523EN

Examples of PDM functions which can be

performed with pdmCLI.exe
Notes
When entering the commands in the prompt or in the script
files, write everything in a single line.
Be sure that slashes or backslashes and spaces are correct.
Replace server name with the actual name of the server.
The commands listed in the examples are distinguished only
by the parts highlighted in bold. Everything before and after it
remains the same.
Opening prompts, creating
script files

Deleting file

2. To delete the 'box.mi' file in the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/'

folder, enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe Delete /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/
box.mi --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-addre
ss=servername:9999
3. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Listing files in a folder

4. To list all files in the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1' folder,

enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe List /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --servi
ce-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:
9999
5. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Creating a list of attributes

S523EN

1. Either
Start prompt from Windows.
Go to the ':\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin'' folder.
or
Write cd C:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin in
self-written BAT script file (*.bat).
Add the following (exemplary) command lines.

2007-04-20

6. To create a list of attributes, enter the following command:

pdmCLI.exe ListAttributes --service-name=
TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:9999
7. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

0BBasics

35

Creating a new (sub) folder

8. To create a folder '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1', enter the

following command:
pdmCLI.exe Mkdir /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --serv
ice-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address
=servername:9999
9. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Deleting a (sub) folder

10. To delete the folder '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1', enter the

following command:
pdmCLI.exe Rmdir /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --serv
ice-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address
=servername:9999
11. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Copying a single file into a

different folder

12. To copy the 'box.mi' im Ordner '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1'

file into the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2' folder, enter the
following command:
pdmCLI.exe Copy /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1/ box.mi
--target-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2 -service-name=TruTopsPDM2 -- port-address
=servername:9999
13. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Copying several files into a

different folder

14. To copy all files from the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1'' folder

into the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2' folder, enter the
following command:
pdmCLI.exe Copy /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --targe
t-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2 --service-n
ame=ToPs_PDM --port-address =servername:9999
15. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Moving a single file into a

different folder

16. To
move
the
'box.mi'
file
from
the
'/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1/'
folderto
the
'/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2' folder, enter the following
command:
pdmCLI.exe Move /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/ box.m
i --target-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2 -service-name=TruTopsPDM2 -- port-address
=servername:9999
17. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Moving a folder

18. To move the '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1' folder to the

'/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2' folder, enter the following
command:
pdmCLI.exe Move /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1 --targ
et-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2 --servicename=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address
=servername:9999
19. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

36

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

Redefining file properties and

dependencies

S523EN

2007-04-20

20. Enter the following command:

pdmCLI.exe Rescan --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 -port-address=servername:9999
21. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

0BBasics

37

1.10 Characteristics: a property of elements

and contours
A characteristic is a property which one or more elements or one or
more contours possess.
Characteristics are created in TruTops CAD, saved in the geo file
and can be evaluated in other TruTops applications.
Advantages:
Rows of holes and hole grids can be machined more easily:
Rows of holes that have been created in TruTops CAD through
>Create >Macros >Row of hole can also be evaluated in other
TruTops applications. The conversion into rows of holes is no
longer required. As a result, it is also possible to create rows of
holes which are not axially parallel. The NC program is
shortened.
In TruTops CAD, Geometries with the characteristic Property
are interpreted as a unit. All actions are applied to the entire
unit, reducing the drawing effort considerably.

Switching "Characteristic fixed" on or off TruTops behavior

"Characteristic fixed" is active:
Certain elements are combined to form a unit with the
characteristic property. If the "Characteristic fixed" is active,
then a certain action is applied either to the complete unit (i.e.
to all elements) or the action is rejected.
For example, a single element of the "Single square hole" unit
cannot be deleted. The entire single hole is deleted.
All impermissible actions result in the contour or the element
being displayed in pink. The colored highlight is kept up to the
next redrawing.
Examples:
A single stroke cannot be stretched. The single stroke is
displayed in pink.
It is not possible to shorten elements for single strokes. The
elements are displayed in pink.
Clicking on an element results in the selection of the entire
unit (all elements). When boxing in an element using the
mouse, an action is executed only if the entire unit has been
boxed in.

38

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

"Characteristic fixed" is not active:

If "Characteristic fixed" is not active, the elements of contours
can be arbitrarily modified with the Property characteristic. A
single element of the single square hole can be deleted, for
example. During modification, the Property characteristic is lost
and the display color "orange" is reset to the normal line color.
Example

Single square hole

"Characteristic
fixed"

Delete

Active

Element Contour

Not
active.

The entire single hole is deleted.

X

X
Row of square
holes

Effect

The single element of the single hole is deleted.

The display color changes from orange to the normal
line color. The characteristic is dissolved.
X

The entire single hole is deleted.

The entire row of holes is deleted.

The entire single hole is deleted.

The row of holes remains unchanged.

The clicked contour of the row of holes is displayed
in pink.
If the drawing is updated ( ), the original state is
restored.
The clicked element of the contour is deleted.
The remaining holes are assembled into smaller
rows of holes.
(Example: row of holes with 10 holes, an element of
hole 3 is deleted: one of the new rows of holes
consists of holes 1 and 2, the other consists of holes
4 to 10.)

The clicked contour is deleted.

The remaining holes are assembled into smaller
rows of holes.
(Example: row of holes with 10 holes, an element of
hole 3 is deleted: one of the new rows of holes
consists of holes 1 and 2, the other consists of holes
4 to 10.)
Tab. 3

Switching "Characteristic
fixed" on and off

Highlighting characteristics
Removing characteristics

S523EN

2007-04-20

1. Select >Edit >Characteristic fixed.

or
Select Fix characteristics
. (If "Characteristic fixed" is
activated, the button is pressed).
2. Select Highlight characteristics
.
The characteristics are displayed in orange.
3. Select >Edit >Delete >Characteristics.
or
Select Delete characteristics
.

0BBasics

39

Notches: Advanced options through the

"Characteristic" property
The "Characteristic" property automatically increases the number
of options for shaping and processing notches:
Notches can be enhanced by roundings, bevels or
sub-notches.
Roundings, bevels, separating cuts or sub-notches can be
removed from a notch. TruTops CAD joins adjacent notch
elements automatically.
If a notch is deleted entirely, the adjacent elements are joined
again.
Notches can be copied, moved, rotated, mirrored and
stretched.
The length of end elements of notches can be changed.

40

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

1.11 Screen display

Adapting window size
The window size can be adapted in a stepless manner. This is
advantageous, for example, when working with online
documentation simultaneously, or when the start bar lies over the
TruTops command bar.
Drag the window frame to the desired size with the mouse.

Modifying color scheme

The following color schemes are possible:
Bright (white) background.
Dark (black) background.
Blue background.
Gray background.
Each color scheme affects only the current application (CAD, Nest,
Laser, Punch ...).
1. Either
Select >Tools >Options....
or
Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....
Select the "Options" tab.
2. Open the color scheme with and mark the desired color
scheme.

Moving masks and messages on the

interface
In TruTops, masks and messages can be freely moved on the
interface. This is advantageous, for example, when a message and
the objects under the message need to be visible.
1. Click on the title bar of the mask or the message.
2. Holding down the mouse button, move to the desired position.

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

41

1.12 Display of drawings

Restructuring display of drawings
Either
Select >View >Zoom >Update.
or
Press <F5> button.
or
Select Update drawing
.

Displaying drawing completely

Either
Select >View >Zoom >All.
or
Press <Ctrl>+<T>.
or
Select Total view
.

Displaying detail view

42

Boxing in desired detail

1. Either
Select >View >Zoom >Detail.
or
Select Detail view
.
2. Click on the first point in the box using the mouse pointer
(cursor).
3. Click on the opposite point in the box.

Zooming in (detailing)

4. Right click on the desired detail in the graphics area.

The graphics is zoomed in on. The pick point in the graphics
area becomes the new center.

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

Zooming out

5. Use the middle mouse button to click on the desired detail in

the graphics area. (If a wheel mouse is used: press the wheel
of the wheel mouse).
The graphic is zoomed out from. The pick point in the graphics
area becomes the new center.

Moving screen section

Either
Select >View >Zoom.
Select >Up, >Down, >To the left or >To the right.
or
Position the mouse pointer (cursor) as sizing tool in the
working area.
Keep the wheel of the wheel mouse (or the middle button)
pressed.
Move the mouse pointer.
Tip
Depending on the usual method, the <Ctrl> button can be
pressed. This however is not necessary.

Zooming drawing
Either
To zoom steplessly: position the mouse pointer (cursor) in
the working area.
Keep the right mouse button pressed.
Push the mouse downwards (zoom out) or upwards (zoom
in).
or
To zoom stepwise: position the mouse pointer (cursor) in
the working area.
Keep the <Ctrl> button pressed.
Zoom in on or zoom out from the drawing using the wheel
of the wheel mouse.

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

43

Get last view

TruTops memorizes the last view that was set through a button or
using the mouse.
Either
Select >View >Zoom >Last zoom.
or
Select Show last view
.

Memorizing and recalling view

Memorizing view

Getting saved view

1. Set Total view

or Detail view
that is to be saved using
the mouse or the buttons.
2. Either
Select >View >Zoom >Memorize zoom.
or
Select Memorize view
.
3. Either
Select >View >Zoom >Get zoom.
or
Select Get view
.

Displaying and hiding outline points

Either
Select >View >All points or >View >Open points.
or
Select Show all points
or Show open points

44

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

1.13 Operating TruToPs with the mouse

Placing the mouse pointer in masks
automatically at OK
1. Select >Tools >Modify data....
2. Select >User >Configuration.
The "Configuration" mask is displayed.
3. Select "Place mouse pointer at OK".
4. Select Modify.

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

45

1.14 Operating TruTops using keyboard

Using Windows keyboard commands and
shortcuts
TruTops can now be operated using the usual Windows keyboard
commands or shortcuts:
All menu items linked with a shortcut have been appropriately
marked (e.g. >File >Open...: <Ctrl>+<O>).
The keyboard commands for the Command block (9) (see
"Fig. 50209", pg. 24) are displayed in the appropriate tool tip:

Total view: <Ctrl>+<Enter> ( ) or <Ctrl>+<Return> ( ).

End: <Esc>.

Ok: <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Example 1

1. To save a file: press <Ctrl>+<S> (instead of selecting >File

>Save).

Example 2

2. To undo an action: press <Ctrl>+<Z> (instead of selecting

>Edit >Undo).

Entering numerical values and coordinates

Entering decimal values

1. When entering decimals, use a point as separator. (Example:

enter 30.5.)
2. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Entering coordinates

3. Enter X and Y coordinates separated by a comma. (Example:

enter X = "10 mm", Y = "20,5 mm": 10,20.5.)
4. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Entering texts in input fields

1. Click into the input box with the mouse pointer (cursor).
2. Enter characters one after the other.
3. To confirm the input: Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

46

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

Using key functions of TruTops

During initial installation and update of TruTops, the Windows key
functions are automatically set in the individual applications.
However, one can also work with the TruTops key functions on
request.
Note
The key functions must be separately set in each existing
application.
1. Select the application in which the TruTops key functions are
to be set.
2. Select >Tools >Modify data....
3. Select >User >Configuration.
The "Configuration" mask is displayed.
4. Select "Set TruTops key functions".
5. Select Modify.
Key

Configuration

TruTops key functions

Windows key function

Jump to next input field..

Confirm mask; is the same as

pressing Ok.

<>, <>

Delete characters in input fields.

<SHIFT>+<Backspace>

Delete characters in input fields.

Delete characters in input fields.

<Tab>

Jump to next input field. All the field contents are automatically marked.

<Tab>+<> or <Tab>+<>

Jump to next input field. Automatic marking of all the field contents is
removed.

Keep <SHIFT> pressed, mark the

area using <> or <>.

Mark selected field contents from the cursor position onwards.

Keep <SHIFT> pressed + <Pos 1>

(German keyboard) or <Home>
(English keyboard).

Mark from the cursor position to the start of the input field.

Keep <SHIFT> pressed + <End>

Mark from the cursor position to the end of the field.
(German keyboard) or <End> (English
keyboard).
(Field contents are marked)
<Entf> (German keyboard) or <Del>
(English keyboard)

Delete marked field contents.

(Field contents are marked)

Press desired character.

Marked field contents are replaced with the character pressed.

<SHIFT>+<Tab>

Jump to previous input field.

<Esc>

Delete characters in input fields.

Close mask; is the same as pressing:

Cancel.

TruTops or Windows key functions

S523EN

2007-04-20

Tab. 4

0BBasics

47

Using "Copy" "Paste"

The "Copy and Paste" function is available in all TruTops input
fields.
Depending on the position of the cursor in the input field, the
contents are copied either completely or only partly into the
intermediate memory.
When pasting, the copied contents appear at the point where the
cursor is located.
Contents of the intermediate memory can be pasted from other
programs and into the TruTops input fields and vice versa.
Copy and paste as described in the following table.
Copying

Pasting into empty input field

Cursor position

Key
combination

Key
combination

Result

Example 123

<CTRL> + <C>
or
<Strg> + <C>

<CTRL> + <V>
or
<Strg> + <V>

Example123

Example123
Example123

Example123
ple123

Copying and pasting

Tab. 5

Using keyboard buffer of the command line

(repeating entries)
Repeated entries and functions do not need to be reentered.
The keyboard buffer saves entries or functions which have been
entered into the command line or which have run in the
background. The last commands can be opened and scrolled
through using :
1. Open the list field of the command line with .
2. Mark the desired command or the desired entry.
3. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).
The command or the entry is repeated.

48

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

1.15 Calculator
You can carry out the following actions using the calculator:
Entering numerical values and coordinates.
Executing arithmetic operations and entering the result of the
arithmetic operations simultaneously.
The calculator is automatically activated during a new installation
and a TruTops update. It can be operated with the mouse as well
as (to some extent) with the keyboard in all modules. It gets
automatically displayed on double clicking in an input field.
Calculator function

Operation using the

mouse

Operation using the

keyboard

Opening the calculator

Double click in an input

field for numerical
values.

(Not possible)

Deleting an entry

C / Cl

(Not possible)

Exiting the calculator

without adopting entries

Cancel

<Esc> (Possible only if

the Windows key
functions have been
set)

Exiting calculator,
adopting entry

OK

(Not possible)

Squaring

x2

(Not possible)

pi

Pi

(Not possible)

Multiplying

<*>

Dividing

</>

Adding

<+>

Subtracting

<->

Result

Calculator functions

Tab. 6

Deactivating calculator permanently

The calculator is automatically activated during a new installation
and a TruTops update.
To deactivate the calculator permanently: set the value of the
"ST_NumInputWithMouse" variable in the public rules to 0
(under >Tools >Modify data... >Rules >System).

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

49

Entering numerical values in input fields

1. Position the mouse pointer (cursor) in the input field for
numerical value.
2. Double click.
The "easy" calculator is displayed:

Fig. 20085en

3. Click on the desired figures and arithmetic operations or enter

them using the keyboard.
4. Select OK.
The calculator is closed.

Entering X and Y coordinates of points

1. Select Calculator
(on the left near the command line).
The calculator extended by "coordinate" is displayed.
2. Enter the numerical value of the X coordinate in the upper
input field.
3. Select X.
The value is adopted in the lower input field.
4. Enter the numerical value of the Y coordinate in the upper
input field.
5. Select Y.
The value is adopted in the lower input field.
6. Select OK.
The calculator is closed.

50

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

1.16 Searching with the help of place

holders (wildcards)
Place holders simplify the search, when a designation (e.g. a file
name) or a number (e.g. a technology table) is not exactly known.
The following place holders can be used in the TruTops file
browser:
? = 1 arbitrary character.
* = arbitrary character string.
In case of database accesses (under >Tools >Modify data...) and
when selecting the technology table, the percent sign ("%") is a
place holder for arbitrary characters:
1% = 1, subsequently none, one or several arbitrary characters.
%1 = none, one or several arbitrary characters, subsequently 1.

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

51

1.17 TruTops license

Using TruTops with a limited period license
If TruTops has to be used for a limited period without Dongle, a
limited period license can be applied for.
The running time of the limited period license is 30 days. After
expiry, a new limited period license can be generated only in
exceptional cases.
Conditions
A network card is present (required for unequivocal
identification of the system).
The user has administrator rights when entering the system
identification and the license key.
Applying for a limited period
license

Entering license key

52

0BBasics

1. Start TruTops.
A "System identification" mask is displayed. As soon as this
mask is displayed, the running time of 30 days begins.
2. Either
Copy the digit and letter sequence of the "System
identification" and send it to the TRUMPF Software
Support by email.
or
If no emails can be sent from the TruTops computer: select
Display form.
The default text editor displays a file.
Save the file and send it to the TRUMPF Software Support
from another computer.
3. To close the mask: select Cancel (selecting OK could lead to
an error message!).
TRUMPF Software Support sends the license key and other
information.
4. Start TruTops.
A "System identification" mask is displayed.
5. Enter the license key (copy from the email and paste).
6. Select OK.

2007-04-20

S523EN

1.18 Printing
Printing the textual content of the files
The textual content e.g. of the following file types can be printed:
Drawings ('*.GEO').
NC programs ('*.LST').
Mini nests ('*.MTL').
Processed geometry ('*.GMT').
Others such as '*.TAF' or '*.TMT'.
1. Select >File >Print >File....
The TruTops file browser opens.
2. Select file type (e.g.: '*.EIN').
All the files in the selected format that are located in the current
directory are displayed.
3. Mark a file.
4. Select OK.
The contents of the file are displayed.
5. Select Print.
6. Select Ok to close the mask.

Printing screen content

The present screen can be printed with this function.
1. Load the file whose screen content is to be printed.
2. Select >File >Print >Screen....
The standard printer mask is displayed.
3. If required, modify the settings.
4. Select OK.
The screen content is printed.

S523EN

2007-04-20

0BBasics

53

Printing Geos as HPGL

TruTops CAD can print GEO files in the '*.HPGL' format (=
graphical output of plotters).
1. Load the desired file in the '*.GEO' or '*.DXF' format.
2. Select >File >Print >Plotting....
The "Plotting" mask is displayed.
3. Make the desired settings.
4. Select OK.
The 'GEO' is printed in the '*.HPGL' format.

54

0BBasics

2007-04-20

S523EN

2.

Setting basic data

(See the TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch software manuals,

chapter "Setting basic data".)

S523EN

2007-04-20

1BSetting basic data

55

3.

Opening and saving files

3.1

TruTops file browser

The TruTops file browser features the following functions:

Convenient and simple operation with a user-friendly interface
(Windows standard).
Advanced search functions: various additional configurable
search criteria assist you in systematic part management.
All files in the TruTops file browser are displayed in a folder
structure.
The dependencies between files are displayed.
Simple import and export of files.

Navigate back

Update view

Navigate forwards

Navigator

Go to the next higher directory

Current path

Filter view (search)

10 Directory contents

Folder view

11 Show directories from which a

file has already been opened

Create new folder

TruTops file browser (here via Open file, with PDM)

Last selected folder

56

Fig. 41363en

TruTops shows the current path under the toolbar (9).

To display folders from which a file has already been loaded: open
current path with (11).

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

File sorting options

The files displayed can be sorted according to the required detail

by clicking on the detail (e.g. "File size").
The detail according to which the sorting is to be done, is marked
gray. Clicking on the detail repeatedly modifies the sorting direction
(upward/downward).

Context menu of the TruTops

file-browser

Context menu

Context menu of TruTops file browser (here via Open

file, with PDM)

Fig. 41364en

Note
Menu items that cannot be selected at the relevant point are
grayed out.

Opening the TruTops file browser

The TruTops file browser is automatically opened when, for
example, a file is opened with >File >Open or a file is saved with
>File >Save.
Additionally, the TruTops file browser can be opened independent
of the loading or saving of a file:
In an arbitrary TruTops application: select >File >File
browser....
or
Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM browser.

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

57

Creating new folders

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Either

Select (Create new folder).

or
Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Select >New.
3. Enter name of the new folder.
4. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).
5. If required, refresh view with
(Refresh) or <F5>.

Deleting folders
1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Mark the folder to be deleted.
3. Either
Press <Entf> or <Del>.
or
Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Select >Delete.
4. Confirm the query with OK.

58

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Renaming files or folders

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Either
Change to the folder to be renamed.
Mark the folder.
or
Change to the folder in which files are to be renamed.
Mark a file.
3. Either
Left click once on the folder or file name.
or
Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Select >Rename.
4. Enter the new name.
5. Confirm the new name with <Enter> or <Return> ( ) or left
click outside the folder or file name.

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

59

Deleting and restoring files, emptying the

recycle bin (PDM)
When working with PDM, deleted files are moved to the recycle bin
of the file browser. It is possible to restore files from the recycle bin
if required (including all attributes such as material, material
thickness etc.).
The folder name of the recycle bin is 'RecycleBin' and can be
modified (at the PDM server) through the PDM administrator.
When working in the file system, only a query appears asking
whether the file should be deleted permanently.

60

Deleting files

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File

browser).
2. Change to the folder from which files are to be deleted.
3. Mark the file(s) to be deleted. To mark several files: press
<Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
4. Either
Press <Entf> or <Del>.
or
Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Select Delete.
5. Confirm query.
When working with PDM, the files (including the path
specifications and the extension '.trash.zip') are moved to the
recycle bin of the file browser.
Tip
To delete files permanently (then they are not moved to the
recycle bin and can not be restored): press the Shift key when
deleting files.

Restoring deleted files

6. Change to the recycle bin of the TruTops file browser

('RecycleBin').
7. Mark the file to be restored (i.e. the complete file specification
with the file names and the extension '.trash.zip'). To mark
several files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
8. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
9. Select >Restore.

Emptying recycle bin

10. Change to the recycle bin of the TruTops file browser

('RecycleBin').

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

11. To delete single files in the recycle bin permanently: mark the
files. To mark several files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
12. To delete all files in the recycle bin permanently: mark files with
<Strg>+<A> or <Ctrl>+<A>.
13. To delete the complete recycle bin permanently: mark the
recycle bin ('RecycleBin').
Note
If the entire recycle bin is deleted (folder including its content),
it is automatically recreated the next time a file is deleted.
14. Either
Press <Entf> or <Del>.
or
Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Select >Delete.
15. Confirm query.
Renaming the recycle bin

Note
The recycle bin can be renamed only at the PDM server.
16. Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM Administration
>PDM Admin.
17. Double click in the RECYCLE_BIN_NAME line in the table cell of
the "ParamValue" column (default content of the cell:
RecycleBin).
18. Rename RecycleBin as desired.
19. Select Exit.
20. Select >Start >Settings >Control Panel >Management
>Services.
21. Mark TruTopsPDM2.
22. Select Restart service.

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

61

Searching for files

Note
1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Either
Select
.
or
Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Select Search....
3. Set filters (the filters can be combined) and enter the searched
names (case insensitive). If required, use a place holders (see
"Searching with the help of place holders (wildcards)", pg. 51).
4. Open "Search in:" list field with .
5. Select the folder where the search should be started.
6. If required, select "Search sub-folder".
7. To start the search : select Search.
8. To switch on the folder view again: select
.

62

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Adding other details to the list field of the

files
The TruTops file browser by default displays the "File names", the
"File size" and the "Last write access" (sorted in ascending order of
the file names) in the file view.
The displayed details can be added to (e.g. with "Machine name"
or with "Sheet thickness").
Note
The more details the TruTops file browser displays, the more time
it requires to create the view.

Standard information in the list

List field of the files

header
TruTops file browser

Adding details

S523EN

2007-04-20

Fig. 41788en

1. To add details: right click in the list header (1).

2. Either
Select the desired detail.
or
Select >More.
Select the desired details.
Select OK.

2BOpening and saving files

63

Setting details at the desired

place in the list field

3. Hold down the mouse button and drag the details one after
another to the desired position.
4. To sort files as by a specific detail: click on the detail.
The detail, according to which the sorting is to be done, is marked
in gray. Clicking on the detail repeatedly modifies the sorting
direction (upward/downward).

Opening files with the Geo Viewer

File formats from TruTops (e.g. *.GEO, *.TMT, *.ROT ) can be
opened with the Geo Viewer in PDM. The appropriate link required
to open them with the Geo Viewer is created automatically when
installing TruTops.
Opening a file with the Geo
Viewer

Closing Geo Viewer

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File

browser).
2. Search for the file to be opened with the Geo Viewer.
3. Mark the file.
4. If the file browser was opened via >File >Open or >File >Save:
right click to open the context menu, select >Open.
5. If the independent file browser is opened: double click on the
file.
6. Close Geo Viewer with OK.

Sending files via email

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Search for the file(s) to be sent.
3. Mark the file(s).
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Select >Send to....
6. Select >Mail recipient.
An email mask containing the selected file as an attachment is
displayed. The email can be further processed and sent.

64

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Zipping files
1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Search for file(s) to be zipped.
3. Mark the file(s).
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Select >Send to....
6. Select >Zip file.
A zip file containing all the selected files is created in PDM. The
name of the zip file comprises the name of the file selected first
(without the file extension) and the new file extension: '.tpdm.zip'.
In one more step, the zip file can, for example, be exported into the
file system or be sent to a mail recipient (see relevant sections).

Sending files from PDM to "My Documents"

in the file system
1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Search for file(s) to be zipped.
3. Mark the file(s).
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Select >Send to....
6. Select >My Documents.

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

65

3.2

File properties

Viewing file properties

Note
The properties of files which have been written on an operating
system with a different language and which contain special
characters may be displayed incorrectly.
Either
(With PDM) Display the properties of a file when checking
the dependencies (see "Dependencies between files", pg.
72).
or
Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
Search for the file whose properties are to be displayed.
Mark the file.
Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Select >Properties.
The "Properties..." mask and the "General" tab is
displayed.
To display all the information regarding a file: select the
"File info" tab.
If required, select "Mask attributes that are not occupied".

66

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

3.3

Importing/exporting files and folders

(PDM)

Importing/exporting files using Windows

Explorer (PDM)
The PDM file storage can be used like a normally enabled
Windows folder or enabled network drive. This enables for
example, saving drawings from a CAD system directly in PDM.
Connecting the PDM network
drive

1. Either
Start Windows Explorer.
Select >Tools >Connect network drive.
Select the drive.
Under "folder", enter \\Servername\trumpf_pdm2 or
through Search, search for '\\Servername\trumpf_pdm2'.
(Server name = name of the server on which the PDM has
been installed.)
Select Finish.
or
Start the Windows prompt with >Start >Programs
>Accesories >Command prompt.
Enter
NET USE P: \\Servername\trumpf_pdm2.
(Server name = name of the server on which the PDM has
been installed.) Any free drive letter can be selected as the
drive letter.)

Importing/exporting files

2. Use the selected drive to store files and directories in PDM or

read them out from PDM.

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

67

Importing files and single folders using the

file browser (PDM)
Files and folders are imported using the TruTops file browser as
follows:
PDM adopts the folder structure from the file system and
ensures the correct sequence. All sub-folders are also
imported and their structures are adopted. The target folder in
the PDM can be located anywhere.
TruTops determines existing dependencies between the files
and saves them.
Notes
If a *.GEO file is moved to a different folder after being
imported, TruTops deletes the dependency to all sheets to
which the *.GEO was nested.
Dependencies can only be established to files that are also in
the PDM. No dependencies are generated if, for example, a
nested sheet (*.TAF) is imported before the parts (*.GEO) are
imported.
Depending on the file format, not all dependencies between
the files can be determined when importing. For example,
dependencies to .pdf files are set in TruTops when they are
created. When exporting from PDM or Re-importing into PDM,
no dependencies from .PDF files can be read.
Selecting an import folder

Import folder?

Import file?

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File

browser).
2. Change to the folder into which files are to be imported.
3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
4. Select >Import directory.
The "Import directory" mask is displayed.
5. Change to the folder which is to be imported.
6. Mark folder.
Note
To enable establishing dependencies between files, always
import files in the sequence of their creation or import them
folder by folder.
7. Select >Import file.
The "Import file(s)" mask is displayed.
The mask has the same functions as the file browser (e. g.
adding further details to the list field of the files, searching for
files in the filter view...; see section "TruTops file browser").

68

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

8. To restrict the file selection in the folder view ( ): open the

"File type" list field with .
9. Select file type.
10. Marked searched files. To mark several files: press <Strg> or
<Ctrl> pressed.
11. Select OK.

Importing several folders in a single job step

(PDM)
Several folders (that are independent of each other) can be
imported into the TruTops PDM in a single job step via the "PDM
importer".
Additionally, a different target folder can be selected in the TruTops
PDM for each folder. TruTops determines existing dependencies
between the files and saves them.
Selecting a folder

Defining target paths

Delete folder from the import

list?
Updating file dependencies
after import

S523EN

2007-04-20

1. Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM Importer.

2. In the "PDM directory import" mask, mark the folder to be
imported.
.
3. Transfer the folder to the right list field with
4. To import other folders: repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. Right click on the folder symbol under "Target path".
The "Selection of PDM target path" mask is displayed.
6. Select target folder.
7. Select OK.
8. Mark the folder to be deleted.
9. Select
.
Note
When importing folders, the dependencies between files are
automatically checked and entered in the PDM. A '.TAF', for
example, knows which '.GEO' it uses. A '.GEO', however, does
not know the '.TAF' in which it is being used.
If all '.TAF' files are imported from one folder first and then the
corresponding 'GEO' files belonging to them are imported from
another directory, the dependencies cannot be entered during
the import.
10. To set the dependencies correctly after the import: select
"Update file dependencies after import".

2BOpening and saving files

69

Starting import

11. If all folders to be imported have been transferred to the right

list field and the target folders have been defined: select Start
directory import.
12. After the import: select Exit.

Exporting files using the TruTops file

browser (PDM)
1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Either
Change to the folder to be exported.
or
Change to the folder from which files are to be exported.
Mark the file(s) to be exported.To mark several files: press
<Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
4. Select > Export.
The "Target path for export..." mask is displayed.
5. Change to the folder into which the files are to be exported.
6. Mark folder.
7. Select OK.

70

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Importing/exporting files using the

prompt/script (PDM)
Files and folders can also be imported into PDM or exported from
PDM using the Windows prompt or an automated procedure using
script files (*.bat) (see "Calling up PDM functions via command
prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)", pg. 33).
Exporting/importing using
the prompt
Exporting a file

3. To export files, enter the following command (enter everything

in one line, and observe slashes or backslashes and spaces!).
Replace highlighted example names with actual names:
pdmCLI.exe Get --service-name=ToPs_PDM --portaddress=servername:9999 --target-directory=
C:\target directory/source directory/example
file.geo
4. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Exporting a directory

5. To export directories, enter the following command (enter

everything in one line, and observe slashes or backslashes
and spaces!). Replace highlighted example names with actual
names:
pdmCLI.exe Get --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --po
rt-address=servername:9999 --recursive --use-e
ntity-directory --target-directory=C:\target d
irectory/source directory/example directory
6. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Importing files

7. To import files, enter the following command (enter everything

in one line, and observe slashes or backslashes and spaces!).
Replace highlighted example names with actual names:
pdmCLI.exe Put --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --po
rt-address=servername:9999 --target-directory=
/target directory C:\source directory
\ example file.geo
8. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).

Automated export/import
using script files

S523EN

1. Start the Windows command prompt.

2. Change to the ':\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin' folder.

2007-04-20

9. Write
cd C:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin
self-written BAT script file (*.bat).
10. Add the above (exemplary) command lines.

2BOpening and saving files

in

71

3.4

Dependencies between files

Checking dependencies between files (PDM)

A file can, on the one hand, form the basis for other files and, on
the other hand, be based on other files. Checking these
dependencies is important whenever, for example, a file needs to
be modified or deleted.
Example: The file is the basis for other files
On which sheets ('*.TAF') has a particular part ('*.GEO')
already been nested?
In which NC programs ('*.LST') does a particular GEO file
('*.GEO') occur?
Example: The file uses the other following files:
Which parts ('*.GEO') have been nested on a particular sheet
('*.TAF')?
Note
If a *.GEO file has been moved to a different folder after being
imported, TruTops deletes the dependency to all sheets on which
the *.GEO was nested.
1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Search for the file whose dependencies are to be checked.
3. Mark the file.
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Select >Dependencies (if >dependencies have been grayed
out, the file has no dependencies.)
6. To check which other files the files uses: select the "Used..."
tab.
7. To check which other files are based on the file, select the
"Basis for..." tab.

72

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Fig. 41785en

8. To group the display according to file types: select "Group

according to file type".
9. To view a preview of dependent files: select "Preview"
(self-holding) and mark the desired file.

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

73

3.5

Updated status of the files

Checking the updated status of the files

automatically when loading and saving in
TruTops (PDM)
To automatically check the updated status of the files when
loading them in TruTops: set the value of the
"PDMWarningMode" variables in the public system rules to the
desired value (see TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch software
manual, chapter "Setting basic data"):

0 = Do not check updated status.

1 = Check updated status when loading.

2 = Check updated status when saving.

3 = Check updated status when loading and when saving.

74

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

3.6

Saving TruTops CAD files

Geometry preparation when

saving

When saving two-dimensional drawings, a geometry is

automatically prepared to avoid inaccuracies. All geometry
elements are analyzed and, if necessary, prepared:
The inside and outside contours are determined.
Lines that have been drawn twice are removed.
Contour transitions which have not been drawn cleanly are
cleaned.

Auxiliary lines are not saved

When saving a drawing as '*.GEO' or '*.DXF', the auxiliary lines

and auxiliary circles are not saved.
Tip
To retain auxiliary lines and auxiliary circles as long as you are
working with them, save the drawing as a workfile.

Zero point

When saving drawings as '*.GEO', the zero point of the drawing is

automatically set to the bottom left corner. If a contour has no
bottom left corner, the zero point is set to the bottom left corner of
a circumscribing rectangle.
Tip
To retain the zero point of a drawing as long as you are working
with it, save the drawing as a workfile .

Saving drawings as a workfile

Application: Quick intermediate save of the current status of the
following files without geometry preparation:
Drawings
Geometry templates for single holes, rows of holes, bolt hole
circles and hole grids
The auxiliary lines and auxiliary circles are retained. A workfile
is always overwritten when another workfile is saved.
Directory of the workfile in TruTops CAD:
The directory is set in the "TOPS_PWD" variable in the public
system rules and can be modified there. (See the
TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch software manuals, chapter
"Setting basic data".)
Condition
The drawing is open.
Select >File >Save workfile.
The workfile is saved as 'Workfile_CAD.geo'.

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

75

The Windows user name and the computer name are added to the
name of the workfile.
Example:
'\TRUMPF.NET\Workfiles\workfile_CAD_muellerhe_PC012345.g
eo'
(muellerhe = Windows user name, PC012345 = computer name.)

Saving drawing as GEO

Condition
The drawing is open.
1. Enter the drawing data if required.
2. Either
Select >File >Save.
The drawing is saved with the unchanged name in the
unchanged directory.
or
Select >File >Save as....
Change the directory in the TruTops file browser if
required.
Select "File type"*.GEO.
Enter the file name (without file extension).
Select OK.
The drawing is saved under the new name in the (if
required) new directory.

76

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Entering drawing data

Drawing data means additional information that TruTops accesses,
e.g. when machining a part.
The drawing data is a part of the file properties (see "File
properties", pg. 66).
Condition
The drawing is open.
1. Select >File >Properties....
The "File information" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the desired information:

Open the list fields with .

Mark the selection or enter the data manually.

Tips
To display the "File information" mask automatically the
next time a new geometry is saved: select "Request
properties during saving...".
With Values previously used, the mask can be filled with
the values used last at the press of a button. Only
individual data must be modified then.
3. Make "general settings".
4. If required, go to "TwinLine/Options" and select the desired
options:

If a part is suitable for common cuts (TwinLine): select

"Suitable for TwinLine". Enter the number of parts in X or Y
direction which are to form a TwinLine group.

To define a part as sample part: select "Sample part" and

enter the number (for description of "Sample parts", see
the software manuals of TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch,
chapter "Nesting parts").

To divide sheets in grids in TruTops Laser/Punch and to

place the part in the appropriate grid: select Displace "part
in grid".
With "Part in grid", the sheets are separated into grids
(depending on the size and the shape of the part) and the
parts are regularly transferred in it. The grids may be
divided differently within a sheet if the parts vary.
"Part in grid" is suitable for L-shaped, rectangular and
C-/V-shaped parts. Parts with circular outer contour are
unsuitable". "Part in grid" can improve the material
utilization and generate more homogeneous nesting
patterns.

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

77

Parts displaced in grid

Parts not displaced in grid

Displacing parts in grid - example

Fig. 43220

5. Go to "Technology" if required.
Note
Only enter the number of the process rule if the part is to be
machined with a specific process rule (e.g. if you have created
a process rule of its own for this purpose).
6. To save the drawing data immediately: select Save as.
Note
If the drawing is to be saved only later, the drawing data is also
saved along with it.
7. Close the "File information" mask with OK.

Saving drawings as DXF

Condition
The drawing is open.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

78

Select >File >Save as....

Change the directory in the TruTops file browser if required.
Select "File type"*.DXF.
Enter the file name (without file extension).
Select OK.

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Saving geometry templates as VLG for

single holes, rows of holes and circles of
holes
Condition
A geometry template has been drawn using the drawing
functions in TruTops
or
A geometry template from a CAD system has been read in.
Entering the file name

Define a new zero point?

1. Enter the drawing data if required.

2. Select >File >Save.
or
Select >File >Save as....
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
3. Select "File type"*.VLG.
4. Enter the file name.
5. Select OK.
A query is displayed, whether a new center (with respect to the
zero point) should be defined.
6. If a new center is to be defined: confirm the query with Yes.
7. Enter the X and Y coordinates of the point that is to be the new
zero point (example below: 30,20).
or
Click on the point which is to be the new zero point
(example below: click on M).
The zero point is redefined.

Old zero point

M2 Center and new zero point of

one's own geometry template

M1 Center of one's own geometry

template
Left: before moving; right: after moving

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

Fig. 26986

79

8. To save the new zero point: select >File >Save.

9. Confirm the query as to whether the existing data should be
overwritten.
10. Do not confirm the query as to whether a new center should
be defined (select No).

Saving punching or bending tools as WZG

Condition
A punching tool has been drawn using the drawing functions in
TruTops. (For importing punching tool data, see software
manual of TruTops Punch.)
or
A bending tool has been created using the bending tool
assistant in TruTops(see "Drawing a bending tool", pg. 238).
1. Enter the drawing data if required.
2. Select >File >Save as....
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
3. Select "File type"*.WZG.
Note
Tool drawings are automatically saved in the directory
'\TRUMPF.NET\Data\PunchTools' (punching tools) or
'\TRUMPF.NET\Data\BendTools' (bending tools). The
directory cannot be changed.
4. Enter the file name (without file extension).
5. Select OK.
The "Save tool" mask is displayed.
6. Select "Punching tool" and options for the punching tool.
or

Select "Bending tool" and options for the bending tool.

7. Select OK.
The drawings are saved as tools in the *.WZG format.

80

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

3.7

Opening TruTops CAD files

Opening workfile
Condition
A workfile has been saved.
Select >File >Open workfile.

Opening TruTops files

1. Select >File >Open.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
2. Select the file type:

2D drawings of parts: *.GEO.

Geometries with variants: *.GMV.

Geometry templates: *.VLG.

Tools from TruTops Punch or TruTops Bend: *.WZG.

The file browser displays all files of the selected format which
are located in the current directory.
3. Search for the file if necessary.
4. Mark the searched file.
5. Select OK.

3.8

Opening foreign formats from CAD

systems

Files can be loaded in the following formats:

'*.DXF' (= file format from CAD systems, e.g. AutoCAD).
'*.DWG' (= file format from the CAD system AutoCAD).
'*.MI' (= file format from the CAD system ME10).
Optionally available: '*.IGS' (= file format of various CAD
systems).
All drawings loaded from external systems can be further
processed with the drawing functions of TruTops CAD.

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

81

Loading 2D drawings in the DXF, DWG, IGS

or MI format
Conditions
TruTops CAD can read in only 2D data with standardized Z
coordinates. 3D drawings must be projected onto a plane and
saved as 2D drawings.
'*.IGS': The IGES standard stipulates a fixed format of 80
characters per line. Only drawings which comply with this
standard can be read in.
'*.MI': TruTops CAD can read in only the uncompressed '*.MI'
format as 2D drawing or tube unfolding.
The drawing may only contain machinable contours, in other
words no drawing frames and headers and no auxiliary
geometries.
Bending lines are interpreted only in TruTops Bend. Otherwise,
they are skipped.
Only geometry elements recognized by TruTops CAD may be
transferred.
1. Select >File >Open.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
2. Open the desired folder and select the file type.
Note
If the ''*.MI' format is selected, the TruTops file browser
displays all files that are located in the current directory and
are not TruTops-specific (with and without file extension).
3. Mark the drawing and select OK.
The "... Loading options" mask is displayed for the selected file
format.

82

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Defining loading options for 2D drawings in

DXF or DWG format
Note
Loading options that are not available are always grayed out.
Parameters

Description

"Adopting only particular layers"

By reading in particular layers it is possible to read in geometries of a layer

specifically or leave them out specifically. As a result, time-consuming
post-machining procedures (e. g. deleting dimensions) are no longer required.

"Adopting inactive layers"

Individual layers can be "deactivated" in AutoCad. They are then no longer

displayed.
The inactive layers can be loaded in TruTops.

"Contour preparation"

A tolerance can be entered for the drawing's contour preparation. Points which
are not separated by the defined tolerance are merged into one point.

"Smoothing drawing"

During smoothing, TruTops replaces an existing contour (or contour section)

with a new contour (or contour section).
The aim is to reduce the number of single elements of a contour as far as
possible without deviating too far from the original contour.

"Transferring a block section"

All geometry elements which were defined as a block in '.DXF' or '.DWG'

format while creating a drawing are adopted.

"Adopting only a single block"

This option can be used to adopt a single block with geometry elements in
TruTops and to ignore the remaining drawing. The block can be modified
using t he drawing functions in TruTops CAD and saved as a geometry
template (*.).
Geometry templates can be positioned in a drawing as often as desired
through >Create >Macros (e.g. as hole grids).

"Transferring texts"

Defines whether the texts of the drawing should be transferred and which
TruTops font should be used for this.

"B-splines"

A "B-spline" is a mathematical description of a curve. With this form of

description, the curve is defined by a series of points and further parameters.
If a file contains B-splines, they can be converted into the TruTops elements
"lines" and "arcs".

Loading options for .DXF - description of parameters

Read in only particular

layers?

1. Check "Transfer only particular layers".

The "Existing layers" mask is displayed.
2. Mark the layer to be adopted.
The layer is transferred into the "Layers for transfer" list field.
3. To remove an adopted layer again: execute the procedure in
reverse order.

Adopt inactive layers?

4. Select "Adopt inactive layers".

Prepare contours?

S523EN

Tab. 7

2007-04-20

5. Select "Contour preparation".

6. Enter the tolerance.
Points which are not separated by the defined tolerance are
merged into one point.

2BOpening and saving files

83

Note
If contours have to be smoothed individually (with different
parameters or several times if required), you can also
smoothen them "manually" after loading (see "Smoothing
elements or contours", pg. 180).

Smooth drawing?

7. Select "Smooth drawing".

The "Smooth parameter" mask is displayed.
8. Either
Select the preset "coarse", "medium" or "fine-pitch"
resolution (the respective data is displayed at the bottom).
or
Select "User-defined".
Enter the desired data.
The coarser the resolution, the fewer elements are required.
The new contour section deviates further away from the
original contour.
The higher the resolution, the more elements are required. The
new contour section is the closest to the original contour.
9. Select OK.
Read in block section?
Adopt only single block?

Transfer texts?

Defining options for

B-splines

84

10. Select "Transfer block section".

11. Select "Adopt only single block".
The block can be modified using the drawing functions in
TruTops CAD and saved as a geometry template (*.).
Geometry templates can be positioned in a drawing as often as
desired through >Create >Macros (e.g. as hole grids).
12. Select "Transfer texts".
13. Open the list field of the fonts with .
The TruTops file browser is displayed. It displays all available
fonts.
By
default,
the
fonts
can
be
found
in
the
'...\TRUMPF.NET\Data' directory. The directory cannot be
changed.
14. Mark the font to be adopted.
15. Select OK.
16.
17.
18.
19.

Select "B-splines".
Open the list field with .
To convert B-splines into a contour: mark Interpolate.
Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour during the
interpolation:

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Distance

Minimum length

Interpolation of B-splines

Fig. 25996

The "distance" corresponds to the increment along the curve.

The smaller this value is, the more precisely the interpolation
matches the curve. A disadvantage is that the number of
created lines is increased.
"Minimum length": "Each line must be longer than the value
entered in "Minimum length". The B-spline is not converted if
the total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered
in "Min. length".
20. To convert B-splines into a contour consisting of lines and
arcs: mark Approximate.
21. Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour of lines and
arcs during the approximation:

Distance

Minimum length

Approximation of B-splines

Fig. 25997

The "Distance" corresponds to the maximum distance from the

line and arc to the curve. The curve is divided until the distance
between the approximated contour and the curve is smaller
than the entered value.
"Minimum length": "Each line must be longer than the value
entered in "Minimum length". The B-spline is not converted if
the total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered
in "Min. length".

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

85

Display control polygon?

Display file preview?

Once the loading options are
defined

22. To display the control polygon of the B-splines: mark Control

polygon.
The control polygon joins the control points of B-splines with a
contour, thereby indicating the approximate course of the
curve. The control polygon can be used to estimate the
position of the B-splines.
Application example: A B-spline is too short and therefore
cannot be converted. The control polygon can be used to
estimate where the position of the short B-spline was.
23. Select Show selection.
24. Select OK.
Report that errors have occurred?
To load the file in spite of errors: Select OK.
To display a list of the errors occurred: select Check. The line
to which the error is allocated is specified in the error list.
Some errors are only assigned to one line, others are assigned
to a section of the file. The name of the section is specified if
available. Even the unloaded splines are listed in the error list.
To load the file: select Cancel.
If there are no errors, the 2D drawing is loaded in the '.DXF' or
'.DWG' format.

86

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Defining loading options for 2D drawings in

the IGS format
Parameters

Description

"Contour preparation"

A tolerance can be entered for the drawing's contour preparation. Points which
are not separated by the defined tolerance are merged into one point.

"Smoothing drawing"

During smoothing, TruTops replaces an existing contour (or contour section)

with a new contour (or contour section).
The aim is to reduce the number of single elements of a contour as far as
possible without deviating too far from the original contour.

"B-splines"

A "B-spline" is a mathematical description of a curve. With this form of

description, the curve is defined by a series of points and further parameters.
If a file contains B-splines, they can be converted into the TruTops elements
"lines" and "arcs".

Loading options for .IGS - description of parameters

Prepare contours?

Smooth drawing?

Tab. 8

1. Select "Contour preparation".

2. Enter the tolerance.
Points which are not separated by the defined tolerance are
merged into one point.
Note
If contours have to be smoothed individually (with different
parameters or several times if required), you can also
smoothen them "manually" after loading (see "Smoothing
elements or contours", pg. 180).
3. Select "Smooth drawing".
The "Smooth parameter" mask is displayed.
4. Either
Select the preset "coarse", "medium" or "fine-pitch"
resolution (the respective data is displayed at the bottom).
or
Select "User-defined".
Enter the desired data.
The coarser the resolution, the fewer elements are required.
The new contour section deviates further away from the
original contour.
The higher the resolution, the more elements are required. The
new contour section is the closest to the original contour.
5. Select OK.

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

87

Defining options for

B-splines

6.
7.
8.
9.

Select "B-splines".
Open the list field with .
To convert B-splines into a contour: mark Interpolate.
Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour during the
interpolation:

Distance

Minimum length

Interpolation of B-splines

Fig. 25996

The "Distance" corresponds to the increment along the curve.

The smaller this value is, the more precisely the interpolation
matches the curve. A disadvantage is that the number of
created lines is increased.
"Minimum length": "Each line must be longer than the value
entered in "Minimum length". The B-spline is not converted if
the total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered
in "Min. length".
10. To convert B-splines into a contour consisting of lines and
arcs: mark Approximate.
11. Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour of lines and
arcs during the approximation:

Distance

Minimum length

Approximation of B-splines

Fig. 25997

The "Distance" corresponds to the maximum distance from the

line and the arc to the curve. The curve is divided until the
distance between the approximated contour and the curve is
smaller than the entered value.

88

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Display file preview?

S523EN

2007-04-20

"Minimum length": "Each line must be longer than the value

entered in "Minimum length". The B-spline is not converted if
the total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered
in "Min. length".
12. Select Show selection.
13. Select OK.
The 2D drawing is loaded in the '.IGS' format.

2BOpening and saving files

89

Defining loading options for 2D drawings in

the MI format
Parameters

Description

"Adopting only particular parts"

By reading in particular parts of a drawing it is possible to read in geometries

specifically or leave them out specifically. As a result, time-consuming
post-machining procedures (e. g. deleting dimensions) are no longer required.

"Contour preparation"

A tolerance can be entered for the drawing's contour preparation. Points which
are not separated by the defined tolerance are merged into one point.

"Smoothing drawing"

During smoothing, TruTops replaces an existing contour (or contour section)

with a new contour (or contour section).
The aim is to reduce the number of single elements of a contour as far as
possible without deviating too far from the original contour.

"B-splines"

A "B-spline" is a mathematical description of a curve. With this form of

description, the curve is defined by a series of points and further parameters.
If a file contains B-splines, they can be converted into the TruTops elements
"lines" and "arcs".

"Transfer detail drawings"

In the ME 10 program, it is possible to create detail drawings of a part. These

detail drawings are given part names which begin with a point. Detail drawings
of such parts are normally not loaded by TruTops CAD.

"Generating stroke characteristics"

Single holes with tool information ("stroke characteristics") can be defined and
saved in the MI file in Solid Designer/Sheet Advisor. (Tapping tools are still not
supported.)
If the stroke characteristics are adopted, the single holes obtain the
"Characteristic" property from Solid Designer (see "Characteristics: a property
of elements and contours", pg. 38). TruTops Punch compares the tool IDs and
performs a single stroke with the desired tool (prerequisite: names of the tools
must be the same in Solid Designer and TruTops Punch). The single hole
remains non machined if TruTops Punch is unable to find an appropriate tool.
If the stroke characteristics are not adopted, TruTops compares the
geometries and allocates appropriate tools (TruTops Punch) or machines the
geometry with the laser (TruTops Laser, TruTops Tube). The tool ID is
displayed at each single hole (as text; not machined).
Tool information is stored differently in an MI file than in TruTops Punch:
MI file: The dimensions e.g. of a rectangular tool are described by the
":HORIZ" value for the horizontal dimension and the ":VERT" value for the
vertical dimension.The name of a rectangular tool is "RECT".
TruTops Punch: Tools are defined by the tool type and the dimensions
"Dim.1", "Dim. 2", "Dim. 3" through Macros, Parameters, "Tools".
"Translation" rules must therefore be defined for each tool type of a MI file for
automatic conversions. These tool-specific rules can be saved and applied to
each MI file to be loaded.
TruTops has a pre-defined set of rules for standard tools, which are adapted
to the automatic transfer of TruTops tools in the Solid Designer.

Loading options for .MI - description of parameters

90

2BOpening and saving files

Tab. 9

2007-04-20

S523EN

Only load searched parts of

the file?

1. Select "Only transfer specific parts".

2. Mark the desired part (to display a preview of the part: right
click).
3. Transfer the marked part using the arrow in "Parts for transfer".

Prepare contours?

4. Select "Contour preparation".

5. Enter the tolerance.
Points which are not separated by the defined tolerance are
merged into one point.
Note
If contours have to be smoothed individually (with different
parameters or several times if required), you can also
smoothen them "manually" after loading (see "Smoothing
elements or contours", pg. 180).

Smooth drawing?

6. Select "Smooth drawing".

The "Smooth parameter" mask is displayed.
7. Either
Select the preset "coarse", "medium" or "fine-pitch"
resolution (the respective data is displayed at the bottom).
or
Select "User-defined".
Enter the desired data.
The coarser the resolution, the fewer elements are required.
The new contour section deviates further away from the
original contour.
The higher the resolution, the more elements are required. The
new contour section is the closest to the original contour.
8. Select OK.
Transfer texts?

Defining options for

B-splines

S523EN

2007-04-20

9. Select "Transfer texts".

10. Open the list field of the text fonts with .
The TruTops file browser is displayed.It displays all available
fonts.
By
default,
the
fonts
can
be
found
in
the
'...\TRUMPF.NET\Data' directory. The directory cannot be
changed.
11. Mark the font to be adopted.
12. Select OK.
13. Select "B-splines".
14. Open the list field with .

2BOpening and saving files

91

15. To convert B-splines into a contour: mark Interpolate.

16. Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour during the
interpolation:

Distance

Minimum length

Interpolation of B-splines

Fig. 25996

The "Distance" corresponds to the increment along the curve.

The smaller this value is, the more precisely the interpolation
matches the curve. A disadvantage is that the number of
created lines is increased.
"Minimum length": "Each line must be longer than the value
entered in "Min. length". The B-spline is not converted if the
total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered in
"Min. length".
17. To convert B-splines into a contour consisting of lines and
arcs: mark Approximate.
18. Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour of lines and
arcs during the approximation:

Distance

Minimum length

Approximation of B-splines

Fig. 25997

The "Distance" corresponds to the maximum distance from the

line and arc to the curve. The curve is divided until the distance
between the approximated contour and the curve is smaller
than the entered value.
"Minimum length":"Each line must be longer than the value
entered in "Min. length". The B-spline is not converted if the
total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered in
"Min. length".

92

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

Transfer detail drawings?

19. Select "Transfer detail drawings".

Adopting stroke
characteristics from Solid
Designer?

20. To adopt the stroke characteristics from Solid Designer, select

"Generate stroke characteristics".
21. Select Options.
The "Rule overview" mask is displayed:

Fig. 43564en

"Shop name": Name of the database

which is the source of the information. Normally (if the TruTops
database is calibrated automatically) "Trumpf" is entered here.
"Table": Tool type from the Solid Designer. Corresponds more
or less to the tool types in TruTops (e.g. "rnd" for a round tool).
There is no direct allocation. The special tools from TruTops
are thus distributed among various tables in the Solid
Designer.
"Tool type": Tool type from TruTops.
22. Select tool-specific rules to be displayed in the mask:

To display all rules ever defined (even if the respective tool

does not exist in the current MI file): select "All rules".

To display only those rules required for the current MI file,

select "Rules of current file".

To display all rules not yet defined which TruTops has

created automatically when it did not find an appropriate
rule for a certain tool type: select "Undefined rules".
23. To modify a tool-specific rule: mark the rule and select Modify.
The "Rules for strokes" mask is displayed:

S523EN

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

93

Fig. 43565en

Displaying the MI file preview

Once the loading options are
defined

24. Either
To hide the tool information from Solid Designer: select
"Ignore single stroke" (all the following selection fields are
grayed out).
or
Open "Tool type" with and mark the tool type.
Open the list fields next to the tool dimensions used by
TruTops (dim. 1, dim. 2) with and allocate the
dimension designation of the Solid Designer to them.
25. Confirm the modifications with OK.
26. To delete a tool-specific rule: mark the rule and select Delete.
If rules are changed, you are asked whether the changes are
to be saved after loading the 2D drawing in '.MI' format.
The changed rules apply to all following loading procedures
concerning MI files if the question is answered in the
affirmative.
The changed rules apply to the current file and are
subsequently discarded if the question is not answered in the
affirmative.
All changes to the rules are discarded if the procedure is
aborted.
The preceding zeros of the tool ID are not passed on by the
Solid Designer/Sheet Advisor. To avoid error messages in the
technology of TruTops Punch module, the preceding zeroes of
the concerned tools in TruTops Punch must be deleted
(technology module, >Tools menu, "Tools" mask).
27. Select Show selection.
28. Select OK.
The 2D drawing is loaded in the '.MI' format.

94

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

3.9

Extracting parts and sheets from

foreign formats (assistant for layout)

Extracting parts from drawings in foreign

format and saving as GEO
The assistant for the layout can be used to extract single parts
from drawings in foreign format one after the other and to save
them as *.GEO. The process can be repeated till all parts are
extracted from a drawing.
If all parts from a drawing are to be saved as *.GEOs: select
>Assistants >Layout >Extract sheet >Sheet all (see the next
section).
If the sheet layout is not relevant, the option for saving the sheet
file (*.TAF) can be deselected here.
Extracting selected
elements/entire parts

S523EN

2007-04-20

1. Load drawing in foreign format.

2. If required, select >Assistants >Layout >Find equals.
(If a saved part is present in the drawing several times, the
copies too are found in the same manner).
3. To mark single elements that should belong to one *.GEO:
select >Assistants >Layout >Extract part >Part element.
(>Part element is useful only if the parts in the drawing are not
nested very close to one another.)
or
To save full parts as *.GEO (including all the inside
contours, texts or points contained in it): select >Assistants
>Layout >Extract part >Part contour .
(>Part contour is useful only if the outer contour of the part
is correctly drawn and has no gaps, for example.)
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
4. Enter the file name for the new *.GEO.
5. Select OK.
6. For >Part element: click on or box in one after the other all
elements using a mouse, which should belong to *.GEO.
or
For >Part contour: click on the outer contour of the part
that is to be saved as *.GEO.
(Selected elements can be deselected by clicking several
times or by boxing them in.)
7. After the selection is completed: Press <Enter> or <Return>
( ).
or
Select OK.

2BOpening and saving files

95

Showing storage location

and part names

The *.GEO is saved.

The saved part obtains a characteristic that groups the
elements of the part in the drawing into one unit (see
"Characteristics: a property of elements and contours", pg. 38).
In the "fixed" characteristic setting, certain actions are
therefore either applied to the entire unit, (i.e. on all elements)
or the actions are declined.
If Highlight characteristics is active, the saved parts with a
characteristic are highlighted with a color in the loaded
drawing.
If >Find equals is activated, copies of the part are searched for
(independent of the position and turning position) and
highlighted with a color as well.
8. Select >Assistants >Layout >Show part names.
9. Click on the part whose file name and storage location is to be
shown.
The storage location and the file name are shown.

Extracting parts from drawings in foreign

format and saving as sheet
The assistant for layout can be used to extract selected parts from
drawings in foreign format and to save them as a *.TAF (i.e.
including sheet data). The parts saved in such a manner can be
loaded and machined in "Nest", "Laser" and "Punch".
Showing layout assistant

96

1. Load drawing in foreign format.

2. If required, select >Assistants >Layout >Find equals.
(If >Find equals is activated, all the copies of a part obtain the
same name during automatic saving. If >Find equals is not
activated, each copy obtains a different name.)
3. To save a defined area of the loaded drawing with all the
parts contained in it as sheet geometry (*.TAF) and the parts
as *.GEO: select >Assistants >Layout >Extract sheet >Sheet
box. (The rectangle set up using the mouse leads to the sheet
geometry.)
or
To save all parts within a contour on the loaded drawing
as *.GEO and to adopt the contour (or its circumscribing
rectangle) as sheet geometry: select >Assistants >Layout
>Extract sheet >Sheet contour.
or

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

To save all parts of the loaded drawing as *.GEO and to

adopt the circumscribing rectangle of the drawing as sheet
geometry: select >Assistants >Layout >Extract sheet
>Sheet all.
The "Extract sheet with parts" mask is displayed.

Extracting sheet with parts

S523EN

Fig. 41322en

Defining part data

4. Either
To manually save each single part after the definition of the
sheet through >File >Save as...: select "Parts""Save
manually".
or
To allocate a defined name with consecutive number (e.g.
hugo_01.geo, hugo_02.geo...) to the single parts: open the
selection field "Path" with .
In the TruTops file browser, select the folder in which the
parts located on the sheet are to be saved.
Select OK.
Enter the "name" for the parts found (for example: hugo).
If the *.GEOs are already present and are to be
overwritten: select "Overwrite existing files".

Defining sheet data

5. To save the sheet as '*.TAF': select "Sheet""Generate sheet

file".
(If all parts from a drawing are to be saved as *.GEOs as
quickly as possible and the sheet layout is not relevant:
deselect "Generate sheet file".)
6. Open the "Name" selection field with .
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
7. Enter the name under which the extracted sheet (*.TAF) is to
be saved.
8. Select OK.

2007-04-20

2BOpening and saving files

97

9. Select material (the material thickness is automatically

entered).
10. If the part and sheet data is specified: Select OK.
The circumscribing rectangle of the drawing is saved as sheet
geometry in case of the "Sheet all" area of application. Outer
contours are presented in cyan.
Is the sheet contour considered to be the outer contour of the
part and all outer contours of the parts are considered to be
inside contours of the "sheet part" by mistake?
Select >Assistants >Layout >Reduce.
TruTops makes the following inside contours into outer
contours.
The reduction is repeated if required.
If the selection of the outer contours is correct: select OK.
Select area or mark contour?

11. Set up the desired area using the mouse on the loaded
drawing.
or
Click on the contour (= contour that should become the
sheet geometry).
Outer contours are presented in cyan.
Note
You can select or deselect parts by clicking several times or by
boxing them in.
12. If the selection of the area/of the outer contours is complete:
select OK.

Save parts manually?

13. If "Part""Save manually" has been activated and the marked

part is to be saved manually: select >File >Save as....
or
If the marked part is to be skipped (i.e.) not to be saved:
select >Assistants >Layout >Next part.
14. Repeat manual saving/skipping until all parts have been either
saved or skipped.

Enlarging the view

15. To enlarge the view on the selected sheet or (when saving

parts manually) on the part to be saved: select >Assistants
>Layout >Zoom.
The area is displayed in enlarged form.
16. Select >Assistants >Layout >Show part names.
17. Mark the part whose file name and storage location is to be
shown.
The storage location and the file name are shown.

Showing storage location

and part names

98

2BOpening and saving files

2007-04-20

S523EN

4.

Using auxiliary tools

4.1

Drawing auxiliary lines

Drawing auxiliary line through 2 points

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >2 points.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing an auxiliary line parallel to the

existing auxiliary line
Condition
The drawing contains at least one auxiliary line.

Fig. 4726

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >Parallel.

2. Click on the auxiliary line (P1) for which a parallel line is to be
drawn.
3. For one parallel auxiliary line: click on the point (P2) on the
parallel auxiliary line.
or
For several parallel auxiliary lines: enter all distances at
which parallel auxiliary lines are to be drawn (separate
numerical values through blanks. Do not use any commas.
Example: 10 20 30).
4. Press .
5. Click on the side where the parallel line(s) should appear.

S523EN

2007-04-20

3BUsing auxiliary tools

99

Drawing horizontal or vertical auxiliary lines

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >Horizontal.
or
Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >Vertical.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing an auxiliary line as a tangent at the

arc element and point
Condition
The drawing contains at least one arc element or circle.

P1 Approximate tangent point

P2 End point of the tangent

Fig. 27381

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >Tangent at point.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

100

3BUsing auxiliary tools

2007-04-20

S523EN

Drawing an auxiliary line at right angles to

an element

P1 Point on element

P2 Start point of the auxiliary line at

right angles
Fig. 4729

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >At right angles.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing an auxiliary line through point and

angle of inclination

P1 Start point of the auxiliary line

Angle

P2 Point on the auxiliary line

Fig. 4730

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >X angle.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

S523EN

2007-04-20

3BUsing auxiliary tools

101

Drawing an auxiliary line through point and

angle to the base line

P1 Point on auxiliary line

Angle between auxiliary line and

element

P2 Point on base line

Fig. 4732

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >Angle to line.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing an auxiliary line through tangent at

2 arc elements

P1 First tangent point

P2 Second tangent point

Fig. 4731

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >Tangent at 2 arcs.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

102

3BUsing auxiliary tools

2007-04-20

S523EN

Dividing an element with an auxiliary line

Application: dividing an element between two random points (P1)
and (P2) with a vertical auxiliary line

Fig. 4733

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary line >Division.

2. Either
Click on the first point (P1).
or
Enter the division factor (between 0 and 1).
Division factor 0.5: The auxiliary line is placed at the center
of the base element.
Division factor 0.2 means that the auxiliary line is placed
after one fifth of the base element.
Click on the first point.
3. Click on the second point (P2).

S523EN

2007-04-20

3BUsing auxiliary tools

103

4.2

Drawing auxiliary circle

Drawing an auxiliary circle through three

points

Fig. 4734

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Three points.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing auxiliary circle through center and

radius

Fig. 4735

1. Select >Auxiliary circle >Auxiliary circle >Center radius.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

104

3BUsing auxiliary tools

2007-04-20

S523EN

Drawing auxiliary circle through diameter

P1 Start point of the diameter

P2 End point of the diameter

Fig. 4736

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Diameter.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing auxiliary circle through center and

diameter

Fig. 4709

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Center - diameter.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

S523EN

2007-04-20

3BUsing auxiliary tools

105

Drawing concentric auxiliary circles

Fig. 4737

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Concentric.

2. Click on the base circle (P1).
3. Click on a point (P2) on the arc.
or
Enter the distance.
Positive value: concentric circle outside the basic circle.
Negative value: concentric circle inside the basic circle).

Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to two

elements

P1 Point on first tangent

P3 Point on circle line

P2 Point on second tangent

Fig. 4738

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Two tangents - one

point.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

106

3BUsing auxiliary tools

2007-04-20

S523EN

Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to an

element and two points

Fig. 4739

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Tangent - two points.

Click on approximate tangent point (P1).
Click on a point (P2) on the arc.
Click on a point (P3) on the arc.

Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to three

elements

P1 Tangent point on first element

P3 Tangent point on third element

P2 Tangent point on second

element
Fig. 4740

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Three tangents.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

S523EN

2007-04-20

3BUsing auxiliary tools

107

Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to an

element

P1 Tangent point

P2 Center of the auxiliary circle

Fig. 4741

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Auxiliary circle >Tangent - center.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

108

3BUsing auxiliary tools

2007-04-20

S523EN

4.3

Auxiliary geometry

Note
Auxiliary geometries can be deleted partially or completely.

Deleting auxiliary geometry

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Delete auxiliary geometry.
2. Select All if the auxiliary geometry is to be completely deleted.
or
Click on individual elements if particular auxiliary
geometries are to be deleted.
3. Select Total view to rebuild the interface after the auxiliary
geometries are deleted.
or
Change the window setting.

S523EN

2007-04-20

3BUsing auxiliary tools

109

4.4

Measuring

Measuring the distance between 2 points

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >2 points.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Measuring coordinates of a point

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >Point.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Measuring horizontal or vertical distance

between 2 points
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >Horizontal or >Vertical.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Measuring coordinates, radius and diameter

of a circle
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >Circle.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Measuring angle
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >Angle.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

110

3BUsing auxiliary tools

2007-04-20

S523EN

Measuring length
1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Measure >Length.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

4.5

Zero point of the coordinate system

Displacing zero point

Note
If the zero point of the coordinate system has been displaced and
the *.GEO is then saved and reloaded, the zero point is located
again at the original place: in the lower left corner of the
circumscribing rectangle of the loaded '*.GEO' (1).

Zero point of the coordinate system in the lower left

Offset zero point

corner of the circumscribing rectangle

Fig. 30651

1. Select >Auxiliary tools >Displace zero point.

2. Click on the zero point.

S523EN

2007-04-20

3BUsing auxiliary tools

111

5.

Drawing geometries

Interfaces to CAD systems

In TruTops CAD, drawings can be directly created or read in from

other systems. TRUMPF provides interfaces to foreign formats for
this (see "Opening foreign formats from CAD systems", pg. 81).

Modifying or adding CAD

drawings

CAD drawings can be modified or added using the drawing

functions of TruTops CAD.

5.1

Drawing points

Drawing points
Notes
Points that are to be dot marked must be drawn in cyan(see
"Modifying line attributes (color and line type)", pg. 170).
Dot mark points can be defined as base elements for single
holes, circles of holes and rows of holes (see "Creating single
holes, circles of holes and rows of holes (macros)", pg. 135).
1. Select >Create >Special elements >Point.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

112

4BDrawing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

5.2

Drawing lines

Drawing lines through two points

1. Select >Create >Lines >2 points.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing a line parallel to the existing line

Condition
The drawing contains at least one line.

Fig. 4702

1. Select >Create >Lines >Parallel.

2. Click on the line (P1) for which a parallel line is to be drawn.
3. For one parallel line: click on point (P2) on the parallel line.
or
For several parallel lines: enter all distances at which a
parallel line is to be drawn. (Separate numerical values
with spaces. Do not use any commas. Example:
10 20 30.)
4. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ).
5. Click on the side on which the parallel line(s) should appear.

S523EN

2007-04-20

4BDrawing geometries

113

Drawing horizontal or vertical lines

1. Select >Create >Lines >Horizontal or >Vertical.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing a line as a tangent at an arc

element and point
Condition
The drawing contains at least one arc element or circle.

Fig. 4704

1. Select >Create >Lines >Tangent through point.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing a line at right angles to another

element

Fig. 4705

1. Select >Create >Line >At right angles.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

114

4BDrawing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Drawing a line with point, angle of

inclination and length

Fig. 4706

1. Select >Create >Lines >Angle X.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing a line through a tangent at two arc

elements

Fig. 4707

1. Select >Create >Lines >Tangent at two arcs.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

S523EN

2007-04-20

4BDrawing geometries

115

5.3

Drawing circles

Drawing a circle through three points

Fig. 4914

1. Select >Create >Circles >3 points.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing a circle through center and radius

Fig. 4709

1. Select >Create >Circles >Center-Radius.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

116

4BDrawing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Drawing a circle through diameter

Fig. 4915

1. Select >Create >Circles >Diameter.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing a circle through center and

diameter

Fig. 4709

1. Select >Create >Circles >Center-Diameter.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

S523EN

2007-04-20

4BDrawing geometries

117

Drawing a circle tangential to two elements

Condition
The drawing contains at least two elements.

Fig. 4711

1. Select >Create >Circles >2 tangents-1 point.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing concentric circles

Fig. 4710

1. Select >Create >Circles >Concentric.

2. Click on the base circle (P1).
3. Click on a point (P2) on the arc.
or
Enter the distance (positive value: concentric circle outside
the base circle, negative value: concentric circle inside the
base circle).

118

4BDrawing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

5.4

Drawing polygons

Drawing polygons

Fig. 4708

1. Select >Create >Line >Polygon.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

5.5

Drawing rectangles

Drawing rectangles
1. Select >Create >Lines >Rectangle.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

S523EN

2007-04-20

4BDrawing geometries

119

5.6

Drawing arcs

Notes
Arcs are usually drawn counter-clockwise.
If arcs are to be modified in one work step (e.g. new radius),
they must first be converted into roundings (through >Modify
>Elements >Rounding).

Drawing arcs through three points

Fig. 4712

1. Select >Create >Arcs >Three points.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing arcs through center, start and end

point

Fig. 4713

1. Select >Create >Arcs >Center-Start-End.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

120

4BDrawing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Drawing arcs through diameter

Fig. 4917

1. Select >Create >Arcs >Diameter.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Drawing concentric arcs

Fig. 4714

1. Select >Create >Arcs >Concentric.

2. Click on the point (P1) on the existing arc element.
3. Click on the point (P2) on the new arc element.
or
Enter the distance between the concentric arcs:

To create a concentric arc outside the basic circle: enter

positive value.

To create a concentric arc inside the basic circle: enter

negative value.

S523EN

2007-04-20

4BDrawing geometries

121

Drawing an arc through center, radius, start

and end angle

Fig. 4715

1. Select >Create >Arcs >Center-radius-angle.

2. Click on the center (P1).
3. Click on a point (P2) on the arc.
or
Enter the radius of the arc.
4. Enter the start angle (a).
or
Click on a point (P3) on the arc.
5. Enter the end angle (b).
or
Click on a point (P4) on the arc.

Drawing multicurve contour

A multicurve contour consists of a string of several arcs.
Notes
Multicurve contours can be added to existing elements only.
If there is a auxiliary circle under the arc, no multicurve contour
is created.

Fig. 4918

1. Select >Create >Arcs >Multicurve contour.

2. Click on the end point (P1) of an existing element (arc or line).
(P1) is also the start point of the arc.

122

4BDrawing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

3. Click on the end point (P2) of the arc.

P2 is in turn the start point of the following arc.
4. Click on the next arc point (P3) etc.

Converting arcs into roundings

1. Select >Modify >Elements >Rounding.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

S523EN

2007-04-20

4BDrawing geometries

123

5.7

Drawing notches

Notches can be defined as angular notches or element notches.

They can be created on line, arc or circle elements. Notches have
the "Characteristic" property(see "Characteristics: a property of
elements and contours", pg. 38).
Note
The contour on which the notch is to be defined must exist.
Corner notches

Fig. 19685

Corner notches

Fig. 19686

124

4BDrawing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Creating corner notch with various

distances

SP Vertex

Notch depth of 2. element

Bend relief diameter

Notch depth of 1. element

Fig. 33472

1. Select >Create >Corners/Elements >Notch X/Y corner.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line. If required, enter a
bend relief diameter before selecting the elements.
In workpieces that are bent later, the bend relief reduces the
deformation of the corner.
A bend relief diameter (d) >0 creates notches with part circle. A
bend relief diameter (d) = 0 creates notches without part circle.
If nothing is entered, the notch is created without a part circle.

S523EN

2007-04-20

4BDrawing geometries

125

Creating corner notch with same distances

SP Vertex
A

Bend relief diameter

Notch depth of the first and the

second element
Fig. 19688

1. Select >Create >Corners/Elements >Notch 45 degree corner.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line. If required, enter a
bend relief diameter before selecting the elements.
In workpieces that are bent later, the bend relief reduces the
deformation of the corner.
A bend relief diameter (d) >0 creates notches with part circle. A
bend relief diameter (d) = 0 creates notches without part circle.
If nothing is entered, the notch is created without a part circle.

126

4BDrawing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Creating X/Y element notches

P1 Element

Notch height

Notch width

Bend relief diameter

Notch center
Fig. 19690

1. Select >Create >Corners/Elements >Notch X/Y element.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line. If required, enter a
bend relief diameter before selecting the elements.
In workpieces that are bent later, the bend relief reduces the
deformation of the corner.
A bend relief diameter (d) >0 creates notches with part circle. A
bend relief diameter (d) = 0 creates notches without part circle.
If nothing is entered, the notch is created without a part circle.

S523EN

2007-04-20

4BDrawing geometries

127

Creating acute angle element notches

Fig. 19689

1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

Select >Create >Corners/Elements >Notch acute angle

element.
Enter the notch height (h).
Enter the triangular angle ().
Enter the center of the notch (M).
or
Enter the of the bend relief diameter (d).
In workpieces that are bent later, the bend relief reduces the
deformation of the corner.
A bend relief diameter (d) >0 creates notches with part circle. A
bend relief diameter (d) = 0 creates notches without part circle.
If nothing is entered, the notch is created without a part circle.
Click on the element (P1) at the position where the notch is to
be created.

Creating bend relief later

In workpieces that are to be bent later, a bend relief reduces the
deformation of the corner.
1. Select >Create >Corners/Elements >Bend relief.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line. (Enter bend relief
diameter >0.)

128

4BDrawing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

5.8

Drawing bevels

Bevels have the "Characteristic" property(see "Characteristics: a

property of elements and contours", pg. 38). If a proper bevel
(unlike a line) is deleted, the corner is closed.
During the transfer of foreign formats, bevels might be read as
lines, since not all foreign formats make a distinction between the
bevels and the lines. Lines can be converted into proper bevels
(see "Converting lines", pg. 184).

Drawing bevel with distance to the vertex

Distance between the bevel and

Distance between the bevel and

P2 Point on second element

the vertex (first element)

SP Vertex

the vertex (second element)

P1 Point on first element
Fig. 33468

1. Select >Create >Corners/Elements >X/Y bevel.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

S523EN

2007-04-20

4BDrawing geometries

129

Drawing bevel through vertex

Distance between the bevel and

SP Vertex

the vertex
Fig. 33469

1. Select >Create >Corners/elements >45 degree bevel.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

130

4BDrawing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

5.9

Rounding corners

Rounding corners

Fig. 33470

1. Select >Create >Corners/Elements >Rounding.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

Recreate corners

Fig. 4716

1. Select >Edit >Delete >Element.

2. Click on the corner rounding(s) that is (are) to be deleted.
The corner(s) are recreated.

S523EN

2007-04-20

4BDrawing geometries

131

5.10 Drawing equidistants

Drawing equidistant to the contour
An equidistant is a second contour which runs parallel to the
original contour. It is created at a defined distance to the original
contour:

Fig. 33471

1. Select >Create >Special elements >Equidistant.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

132

4BDrawing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

5.11 Tracing auxiliary geometry

Tracing auxiliary geometry
1. Trace the auxiliary geometries in such a manner that they lead
to the desired geometry.

Fig. 51355EN

2. Select >Create >Special elements >Trace auxiliary geometry.

3. Click on the intersection of the two auxiliary geometries.
4. Click on the auxiliary geometry whose line is to be a part of the
geometry.
A line is drawn up to the next intersection.
5. Click on the next intersection and the next auxiliary geometry.
6. Continue till the geometry is traced.

S523EN

2007-04-20

4BDrawing geometries

133

Redrawn auxiliary lines

134

4BDrawing geometries

Fig. 51356EN

2007-04-20

S523EN

6.

Creating single holes, circles of holes

and rows of holes (macros)

You can use macros to create the following complex geometries in

a simple way:
Single holes
Circles of holes
Rows of holes
Hole grid
Any bend relief.
(Any bend reliefs are single holes. They are calculated with
contours that they cut.).
Circles of holes, rows of holes and hole grids consist of a base
element which is repeated.
The following base elements are possible:
Circles/ellipses/dot mark points
Rectangles/squares
Oblong holes
Geometry templates of your own
Drawings of forming tools
Tool drawings
Overview of the procedure

S523EN

2007-04-20

Determine the base element and its parameters.

Create a single hole, row of holes, circles of holes or hole grid.

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

135

6.1

Defining a circle, ellipse or dot mark

point as base element

Condition
The drawing is open.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select >Create >Macros >Parameter....

Select the "Circle/Ellipse" tab.
Select "Circle", "Ellipse" or "Dot mark point".
Enter the geometry data after selecting "Circle" or "Ellipse".
The geometry data for an ellipse is defined as follows:

"Radius 1" = a/2.

"Radius 2" = b/2.

Geometry data for an ellipse

Fig. 19721

5. Enter the angle of inclination if an ellipse is to be rotated

around itself.

Angle of inclination

Example: angle of inclination 45

Fig. 19722

6. Check "Also rotate geometry" if an ellipse is to be rotated when

creating rows of holes, circles of holes or hole grids:

136

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

2007-04-20

S523EN

Zero point of the ellipse

Left: ellipse is rotated, right: ellipse is not rotated

Fig. 27160

7. Select OK.
The base element is defined.
8. Create a single hole, row of holes, circles of holes or hole grid.

S523EN

2007-04-20

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

137

6.2

Defining rectangle or oblong hole as

base element

Condition
The drawing is open.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select >Create >Macros >Parameter....

Select the "Rectangle/Oblong hole" tab.
Select "Rectangle" or "Oblong hole".
Enter the length and width.
Enter the angle of inclination if the rectangle or oblong hole is
to be rotated around itself:

Angle of inclination

Example: angle of inclination 45

Fig. 19725

6. Enter the corner radius if the base element is a rectangle.

7. Check "Also rotate geometry" the geometry is to be rotated
when creating rows of holes, circles of holes or hole grids.

Zero point of the rectangle

Left: rectangle is rotated, right: rectangle is not

rotated

138

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

2007-04-20

Fig. 27159

S523EN

8. Select OK.
The base element is defined.
9. Create a single hole, row of holes, circles of holes or hole grid.

6.3

Defining your own geometry templates

as base element

Condition
The drawing is open.
1. Select >Create >Macros >Parameter....
2. Select the "Template" tab:
3. To display the geometry template used last, open "Template"
with .
The "Previous models" mask is displayed.
4. In order to select from all geometry templates, click on
Selection.
The TruTops file browser is displayed. displays all files in
*.VLG format which are in the current directory.
5. Also search for the file if necessary.
6. Mark the desired geometry template.
7. Select OK.
8. Enter an angle of inclination if the geometry template is to be
rotated around itself:

Angle of inclination

Example: angle of inclination 45

Fig. 27162

9. Check "Also rotate model" if the geometry template is also to

be rotated when creating rows of holes, circles of holes or hole
grids:

S523EN

2007-04-20

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

139

Zero point of the geometry template

Left: template is rotated, right: template is not

rotated

Fig. 27163

10. Select OK.

The geometry template is defined as a base element.
11. Create a single hole, row of holes, circles of holes or hole grid.

6.4

Defining a forming tool as base

element

The geometries of forming tools from the TRUMPF punching tool

catalog can be used for drawing.
Since they are drawings, it does not matter whether the created
geometry is punched or machined with the laser.
Condition
The drawing is open.
1. Select >Create >Macros >Parameter....
2. Select the "Form model" tab.
3. If the number of the forming tool is known:

Open "Form model type" with .

Mark the number of the forming tool in the following mask.

4. If the number of the forming tool is not known:

Select Selection.

Mark the desired forming tool.

140

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

2007-04-20

S523EN

"Selection" mask

Fig. 41304en

5. Enter the geometry data of the forming tool.

6. Enter the angle of inclination if the forming tool is to be rotated
around itself:

Angle of inclination

Example: angle of inclination 45

Fig. 19725

7. Select "Rotate form model" if the forming tool is also to be

rotated when creating rows of holes, circles of holes or hole
grids.

S523EN

2007-04-20

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

141

Zero point of the shaped tool

Left: shaped tool is rotated, right: shaped tool is

not rotated

Fig. 27159

8. Select OK.
The base element is defined.
9. Create a single hole, circles of holes, row of holes or hole grid.

6.5

Defining tool drawing as base element

Condition
The drawing is open.
Note
This function is activated only in TruTops Punch.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select >Create >Macros >Parameter....

Select the "Tool" tab.
Select tool.
Select OK.
The base element is defined.
5. Create a single hole, circles of holes, row of holes or hole grid.

142

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

2007-04-20

S523EN

6.6

Creating single hole through macro

Condition
The base element is defined.

Circle, ellipse or dot mark point.

Rectangle or square.

Oblong hole.

A geometry template of your own.

Drawing of a shaped tool.

Tool drawing.
Creating single hole

Creating further single holes

1. Select >Create >Macros >Single hole.

The base element is linked to the cursor.
The base element can be rotated using the wheel mouse
(increment of 10 ).
2. Either
Enter or click on the target point for the single hole.
TruTops CAD sets the center of the base element on the
target point.
or
Enter the angle of inclination of the base element.
(TruTops CAD does not take into account the angle of
inclination from the definition of the base element in this
case. The base element appended to the cursor can be
turned further with a mouse wheel).
Enter or click on the target point for the single hole.
The center of the base element is set on the target point.
3. Enter or click on further target points.

Target point and zero point of

the geo

Angle of inclination of the

single hole
Fig. 26988

S523EN

2007-04-20

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

143

6.7

Creating a circle of holes through

macro

A full circle or a partial circle can be created.

Condition
The base element is defined.

Circle, ellipse or dot mark point.

Rectangle or square.

Oblong hole.

A geometry template of your own.

Drawing of a shaped tool.

Tool drawing.

Full circle

Fig. 4757

Part circle

Fig. 4753

1. Select >Create >Macros >Circle of holes.

2. Click on the center (P1).
3. Enter the number of holes.

144

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

2007-04-20

S523EN

4. Enter the start angle ().

or
Define the start angle () by means of two points.
Note
In case of a full circle, the end angle must be 360 larger than
the start angle. (Example: start angle of 0, end angle of 360).
5. Enter the end angle ().
or
Define the end angle () by means of two points.
6. Enter the radius.
or
Define the radius by means of two points.

6.8

Creating a row of holes through macro

Application: Create several equally-spaced (2) holes of the same

size on a straight line (1):
Condition
The base element is defined.

Circle, ellipse or dot mark point.

Rectangle or square.

Oblong hole.

A geometry template of your own.

Drawing of a shaped tool.

Tool drawing.

Length of the row of holes

P2 End point

Distance between the holes

Angle of inclination

P1 Start point
Row of holes

S523EN

2007-04-20

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

Fig. 4752

145

1. Select >Create >Macros >Row of holes.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

6.9

Creating a hole grid through macro

Condition
The base element is defined.

Circle, ellipse or dot mark point.

Rectangle or square.

Oblong hole.

A geometry template of your own.

Drawing of a shaped tool.

Tool drawing.

Distance between the rows of

Distance between the holes

P2 End point

holes

Angle to X axis

P1 Start point
Hole grid

Fig. 40779

1. Select >Create >Macros >Hole grid.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

146

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

2007-04-20

S523EN

6.10 Creating any bend relief through macro

Any bend reliefs are single holes. They are calculated with
contours that they cut.
Any bend reliefs can be used, for example, to create bend reliefs
on notches later.
Any bend reliefs must not be circular. They can be square or
rectangular and can be set at any positions of a closed contour
(even without notches).
Conditions
Any bend relief must consist of precisely one closed contour.
Any bend relief must cut another closed contour.
Notes
Any bend relief cannot be created at open contours.
Free single holes that do not cut anything are not possible
using this function.
1. Select >Create >Macros >Any bend relief.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

6.11 Deleting duplicate single holes

"Duplicate single holes" are single holes that have, for example,
two common rows of holes. "Duplicate single holes" are equally
large, are located exactly over one another and have been
generated through >Create >Macros. (Duplicate single holes that
were not generated through macros are resolved during automatic
saving).
Displaying duplicate single
holes

1. Select >Create >Macros >Display duplicate single holes.

or
Select >View >Display duplicate single holes.

Removing duplicate single

holes

2. Select >Create >Macros >Delete duplicate single holes.

or
Select >Edit >Delete >Delete duplicate single holes.

S523EN

2007-04-20

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

147

If required, the rows of holes and the circle of holes are resolved.
The duplicate single holes are removed.
Then, the remaining holes are assembled into smaller rows of
holes
Example: If two rows of holes have a common hole, one of the
rows of holes is retained. The other one is divided into two small
rows of holes (one each on the "left" and the "right" side of the
other row of holes).

148

5BCreating single holes, circles of holes and rows of

holes (macros)

2007-04-20

S523EN

7.

Machining several outer contours

The assistant for outer contours can be used for drawings that
include only one part, but nevertheless possess several outer
contours (e.g. for double circles that have a core hole with thread
and/or an extrusion, or for open outer contours). TruTops CAD
displays the found outer contours and the outer contours can be
marked, highlighted or deleted if required.

7.1

Displaying outer contours

If a part has several outer contours, this is reported during saving.

Causes for several outer contours:
The drawing consists of several parts.
The drawing contains open outer contours.
There is a "contour in the contour".
Checking for several outer
contours
Removing several outer
contours

1. Select >View >Display outer contours.

All outer contours are presented in cyan.
2. If the drawing consists of several parts: generate and save
several '*.GEO'.
3. For open outer contours, select Show open points ( ). Close
the open contour points.
4. For a contour in the contour: delete the innermost contour.

7.2

Displaying the first outer contour

Condition
A drawing (*.GEO or foreign format) with several outer
contours has been loaded or created.
Select >Assistants >Outer contours >First.
The outer contour is displayed in cyan and the contour points are
outlined.
Contour points are displayed in green if the outer contour is closed
and in red if it is open.

S523EN

2007-04-20

6BMachining several outer contours

149

7.3

Going to the next outer contour

Select >Assistants >Outer contours >Next.

The next outer contour is active. The current outer contour remains
unchanged.

7.4

Highlighting the outer contour

1. Select >Assistants >Outer contours >Highlight.

2. Click on the desired type of selection line or selection color.
The outer contour is displayed with the new line type and in the
new line color and the next contour is active.

7.5

Marking outer contour

Note
If Highlight characteristics is activated, TruTops CAD shows the
elements or contours in orange. The "yellow" line color is covered".
Select >Assistants >Outer contours >Mark.
The element is allocated the "Marking" property and is presented in
yellow. The next contour is active.

7.6

Deleting contour

1. Select >Assistants >Outer contours >Delete.

The highlighted contour is deleted.
2. Delete the superfluous contours one after the other.

150

6BMachining several outer contours

2007-04-20

S523EN

7.7

Selecting the outer contour

When there are several contours present (contour in the contour),

TruTops CAD always initially recognizes the out of line inside
contour as an outer contour. To select the enveloped inside
contour as an outer contour:
1. Select >Assistants >Outer contours >Enveloping.
The enveloping contour is defined as an outer contour.

Enveloping contour

Enveloping contour activated:

deactivated: The smaller circle

The larger circle is shown as

is shown as an outer contour

an outer contour.

(contour in contour).
Example for an enveloping contour

Fig. 46275

2. Highlight, mark or delete the other contours.

3. Create and save several geometries if the drawing consists of
several parts (see section Saving parts of a sheet in a foreign
format as *.GEO).

S523EN

2007-04-20

6BMachining several outer contours

151

8.

Deleting

8.1

Deleting single elements or contours

1. Select >Edit >Delete >Element or >Contour.

2. One after the other, click on or box in all elements or contours
using the mouse.

8.2

Deleting elements with certain line

properties

In TruTops CAD, the properties of elements to be deleted can be

combined in the "Delete selection" mask. (Example: all red and
blue dashed circles.)
1. Selection >Edit >Delete >Selection.
The "Delete selection" mask is displayed.
2. Check the desired box.
Notes
If "lines" or "arcs" are selected, "bevels" and "roundings"
are also activated automatically. If only "lines" or only
"arcs" are to be deleted: deselect "bevels" or "roundings".
The "others" line type comprises all lines that do not
belong to the four categories ("dashed", "dotted",
"point/dash", "solid"). The "Others" line type cannot be
created in TruTops CAD. It can however occur when
loading foreign formats (e.g. '.DXF').
3. Select Delete.

152

7BDeleting

2007-04-20

S523EN

8.3

Deleting small contours

1. Select >Edit >Delete >Small contours.

The "Delete contours" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the area of the contour in [mm2].
3. Select OK.
All contours having an area that is equal to or smaller than the
entered value are deleted.

8.4
Displaying short elements

Deleting short elements

Deleting short elements

1. Select >View >Display short elements.

The "Highlight elements" mask is displayed.
2. Enter length.
3. Select OK.
All elements up to this length are displayed in cyan.
4. Select >Edit >Delete >Short elements.
The "Delete elements" mask is displayed.
5. Enter the length up to which the elements should be deleted.
6. Select OK.
All elements having length that is equal to or less than the entered
value are deleted.

8.5

Deleting characteristics

1. To display elements with the "Characteristic" property in

.
orange: select Highlight characteristics
2. To delete the "Characteristic" property at selected contours:
select >Edit >Delete >Characteristics.
3. Click on or box in contours using the mouse, whose
"Characteristic" property is to be deleted. To remove all
characteristics: select All or press <Ctrl>+<Enter> ( ) or
<Ctrl>+<Return> ( ).

S523EN

2007-04-20

7BDeleting

153

8.6

Deleting dimensioning

1. Select >Edit >Delete >Delete dimensioning.

2. Click on box in dimensioning using the mouse, which is to be
deleted. To remove all dimensionings: select All or press
<Ctrl>+<Enter> ( ) or <Ctrl>+<Return> ( ).

8.7

Deleting duplicate single holes

"Duplicate single holes" are single holes that have, for example,
two common rows of holes. "Duplicate single holes" are equally
large, are located exactly over one another and have been
generated through >Create >Macros. (Duplicate single holes that
were not generated through macros are resolved during automatic
saving).
Displaying duplicate single
holes

1. Select >Create >Macros >Display duplicate single holes.

or
Select >View >Display duplicate single holes.

Removing duplicate single

holes

2. Select >Create >Macros >Delete duplicate single holes.

or
Select >Edit >Delete >Delete duplicate single holes.
If required, the rows of holes and the circle of holes are resolved.
The duplicate single holes are removed.
Then, the remaining holes are assembled into smaller rows of
holes
Example: If two rows of holes have a common hole, one of the
rows of holes is retained. The other one is divided into two small
rows of holes (one each on the "left" and the "right" side of the
other row of holes).

154

7BDeleting

2007-04-20

S523EN

8.8

Deleting auxiliary geometries

1. Select >Edit >Delete >Delete auxiliary geometry.

or
Select >Auxiliary tools >Delete auxiliary geometry.
2. Click on or box in auxiliary geometries using the mouse, which
are to be deleted. To remove all auxiliary geometries: select All
or press <Ctrl>+<Enter> ( ) or <Ctrl>+<Return> ( ).
Tip
To rebuild the interface after deleting the auxiliary geometries:
.
press the <F5 > button or select Update drawing

S523EN

2007-04-20

7BDeleting

155

9.

Element groups

All elements can be combined to an element group. Element

groups have the "Characteristic" property(see "Characteristics: a
property of elements and contours", pg. 38).
In the "fixed" characteristic setting, certain actions are therefore
either applied to the entire unit, (i.e. on all elements) or the actions
are declined.
Advantage: If several actions are to be executed on the elements
of an element group one after the other, the area of application can
be selected by clicking once (instead of clicking on and boxing in
the single elements several times).
An element group can be resolved by removing the "element
group" characteristic. Other characteristics (e.g. "single hole",
"notch", "marking"...) are retained.

9.1

Forming element groups

1. Select >Create >Element group >Generate.

2. Using the mouse, click on or box in all elements one after the
other which are to be combined into one element group using
the mouse.
3. Select OK.
If Highlight characteristics is active (
displayed in orange.

9.2

), the element group is

Dissolving element groups

1. Select >Create >Element group >Dissolve.

2. One after the other, click on or box in all elements using the
mouse whose element group is to be dissolved.

156

8BElement groups

2007-04-20

S523EN

10.

Marking and shading

10.1 Setting marking

Either
To set a "Marking" characteristic: select >Create >Marking.
(see "Characteristics: a property of elements and
contours", pg. 38).
Select the >Element or >Contour area of application.
Click on or box in all elements or contours to be marked
using the mouse.
or
Manually allocate the "yellow" line color to the contours to
be marked (no "Marking" characteristic is set here).
If Highlight characteristics is active ( ), the elements or contours
are displayed in "orange". The "yellow" line color is covered. (The
"yellow" line color should not be changed!)

10.2 Deleting marking

Either
For contours with the "Marking" characteristic: select
>Create >Marking >Remove.
Click on or box in all elements or contours that are not to
be marked using the mouse.
or
Contours having the "yellow" line color, but not the
"Marking" "characteristic": reset manually to the normal line
color.
The "Marking" characteristic is deleted. The elements or
contours are displayed again in the normal line color.

S523EN

2007-04-20

9BMarking and shading

157

10.3 Shading closed contours

Closed contours (e.g. texts) can be marked using hatching.
Contours can be shaded several times to obtain a hatched pattern
(e.g. horizontal and vertical hatched lines).
Hatched lines obtain their own "Marking" characteristic(see
"Characteristics: a property of elements and contours", pg. 38).
1. Select >Create >Marking >Hatch....
The "Definition of hatch" mask is displayed.
2. Select one of the given definitions for hatched lines.
or
Enter the angle of (inclination) of the hatching.
3. Enter the distance between the hatched lines.
4. Select the "Elements" or "Contours" area of application.
Note
If you box in the elements or contours to be shaded using the
mouse, the "Elements" or "Contours" area of application is not
relevant.
On clicking with the mouse, all elements in the "fixed"
characteristic setting and the "Element" area of application
having a common characteristic are shaded. Only the clicked
contour is shaded in the "Contour" area of application.
5. Select OK.
Notes
Only the outer contours of nested contours are shaded.
The inside contours are left out. To shade nested contours,
repeat steps 1 to 6 on the inside contours.
With the "free" characteristic setting and the "Elements"
selection, make sure the entire (closed) contour is boxed in
using the mouse. Contours which have not been entirely
defined are only marked and not shaded.
6. Click on or box in all elements or contours to be shaded using
the mouse.
If Highlight characteristics is active ( ), the hatching is displayed
in orange. The "yellow" line color (for marking) is covered.

158

9BMarking and shading

2007-04-20

S523EN

10.4 Modify hatching

1. Delete old hatching.
2. Create new hatching.

10.5 Deleting hatch

Note
Hatched lines possess their own "Marking" characteristic(see
"Characteristics: a property of elements and contours", pg. 38).
In the "fixed" characteristic setting (through >Edit >Characteristic
fixed), the hatching of a contour can be removed with a click.
1. Select >Edit >Delete >Element.
2. One after the other, click on all hatching(s) to be deleted. (The
hatched lines are completely removed.)

S523EN

2007-04-20

9BMarking and shading

159

11.

Modifying drawn geometries

Geometry elements can be modified in two ways:

Modifying the original element.
Copying the original element. Modifying the copy.

11.1 Moving geometries

Moving geometries horizontally or vertically

Fig. 27704

1. Either
To move the original geometry: select >Modify >Move
>Horizontal or >Vertical.
or
To create copies and move them: select >Modify >Move
>Copy horizontally or >Copy vertically.
Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is not
offered: select >More.)
2. Either
Enter the distance for the movement.
or
Click on the reference point (P1).
Click on the target point (P2).
3. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P3,
P4).

160

10BModifying drawn geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Moving geometries through two points

Fig. 27703

1. Either
To move the original geometry: select >Modify >Move >2
points.
or
To create copies and move them: select >Modify >Move
>Copy two points.
Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is not
offered: select >More.)
2. Click on the reference point (P1).
3. Click on the target point (P2).
4. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P3,
P4).

S523EN

2007-04-20

10BModifying drawn geometries

161

11.2 Rotating geometries

Rotating geometries by a center

Fig. 28062

1. Either
To rotate the original geometry: select >Modify >Rotate
>Center.
or
To create copies and rotate them: select >Modify >Rotate
>Copy - center.
Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is not
offered: select >More.)
2. Click on the center of rotation (P1).
3. Enter the angle of rotation. Example: 90.
4. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P2,
P3).

162

10BModifying drawn geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Rotating geometries by two points

Rotating a geometry by two points corresponds to rotating and
moving the geometry simultaneously.

Fig. 28060

1. Either
To rotate the original geometry: select >Modify >Rotate >2
points.
or
To create copies and rotate them: select >Modify >Rotate
>Copy -two points .
Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is not
offered: select >More.)
2. Click on the reference point (P1).
3. Click on the target point (P2).
4. Enter the angle of rotation. Example: 90.
5. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P3,
P4).

S523EN

2007-04-20

10BModifying drawn geometries

163

11.3 Modifying scale of geometries

Modifying scale of geometries at a center

Fig. 28084

1. Either
To modify the scale of the original geometry: select
>Modify >Scale >Center.
or
To create copies and modify their scale: select >Modify
>Scale >Copy center.
Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is not
offered: select >More.)
2. Click on the center (P1).
3. Enter the enlargement or reduction factor.
4. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P2,
P3).

164

10BModifying drawn geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Scale modification of geometries through

two points

Fig. 28063

1. Either
To modify the scale of the original geometry: select
>Modify >Scale >2 points.
or
To create copies and modify their scale: select >Modify
>Scale >Copy 2 points.
Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is not
offered: select >More.)
2. Click on the reference point (P1).
3. Click on the target point (P2).
4. Enter factor.
5. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P3,
P4).

S523EN

2007-04-20

10BModifying drawn geometries

165

11.4 Mirroring geometries

Mirroring geometries on a horizontal or
vertical mirror line

Fig. 28082

1. To mirror the original geometry: select >Modify >Mirror

>Horizontal or >Vertical.
or
To create a copy and mirror it: select >Modify >Mirror
>Copy horizontally or >Copy vertically.
2. Click on a point (P1) on the mirror line.
3. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P2,
P3).

166

10BModifying drawn geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Mirroring geometries on a symmetry point

Fig. 28064

1. To mirror the original geometry: select >Modify >Mirror

>Center.
or
To create a copy and mirror it: select >Modify >Mirror
>Copy center.
2. Click on the symmetry point (P1).
3. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P2,
P3).

S523EN

2007-04-20

10BModifying drawn geometries

167

Mirroring geometries on a random axis

Fig. 28065

1. To mirror the original geometry: select >Modify >Mirror >2

points.
or
To create a copy and mirror it: select >Modify >Mirror
>Copy two points.
2. Click on the first point (P1) on the mirror line.
3. Click on the second point (P2) on the mirror line.
4. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P3,
P4).

168

10BModifying drawn geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

11.5 Stretching geometries

Stretching geometry horizontally or
vertically

Fig. 4756

1. Select >Modify >Stretch >Horizontal or >Vertical.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Note
Elements cut by the "rubber band" of the frame are stretched.
Elements which are entirely within the mark of the frame are
moved.
3. To stretch several elements: using the mouse, box in all
elements to be stretched.

Stretching geometry with 2 points

Fig. 4754

1. Select >Modify >Stretch >2 points.

2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Note
Elements cut by the "rubber band" of the frame are stretched.
Elements which are entirely within the mark of the frame are
moved.
3. To stretch several elements: using the mouse, box in all
elements to be stretched.

S523EN

2007-04-20

10BModifying drawn geometries

169

11.6 Modifying line attributes (color and line

type)
The line attributes can be modified as follows:
Preset the line color and the line type. All subsequently drawn
elements obtain the new attributes.
Modify the line color and the line type of individual (existing)
elements. The preset line attributes do not change here.
Modify lines of one color and/or line type simultaneously (e.g.
changing all red lines to blue lines or all dashed lines to dotted
lines). The function is especially practical if the imported
drawings whose the line attributes have another meaning are
prepared.

Presetting line color and line type

1. Open the "Current color and line type" selection field with .
2. Click on the desired line type and line color in "Select line
type".
3. Select OK.
All subsequently drawn elements obtain the new attributes.

Modifying line color/line type of individual

existing elements
1. Select >Modify >Elements >Color or >Line type.
2. Click on the desired line color or line type.
3. One after the other, click on or box in all elements using the
mouse whose line color or line type is to be modified.

170

10BModifying drawn geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Modifying lines of one color and/or line type

simultaneously
1. Select >Modify >Elements >Change color... or >Change line
type....
2. Click on the desired original color or original line type.
3. Click on a new color or new line type.
4. Select OK.
For example, all red lines are changed to blue lines or all dashed
lines are changed to dotted lines.

S523EN

2007-04-20

10BModifying drawn geometries

171

11.7 Modifying radii and diameters of

roundings or circles
Note
Arcs whose radius is to be modified, must be converted into
roundings first (through >Modify >Elements >Rounding).

Modifying rounding radius

1. Select >Modify >Elements >Rounding radius.
2. Enter a new rounding radius in [mm].
3. If roundings with only a certain radius are to be modified, enter
the radius to be modified too.
4. To modify single roundings: click on the roundings one after
the other.
or
Box in the roundings using the mouse.
5. To modify all roundings: select All.

Modifying diameter of circles

1. Select >Modify >Elements >Circle diameter.
2. Enter a new circle diameter in [mm].
3. If circles with a certain diameter are to be modified: enter the
diameter to be modified too.
4. To modify single circles: click on the circles one after the other.
or
Box in the circles using the mouse.
5. To modify all circles: select All.

172

10BModifying drawn geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

12.

Clearing geometries

12.1 Splitting or combining elements

Elements are separated, for example, if a part is deleted from
them. Two elements can be separated at their intersections and
single elements can be deleted from them.
Note
If a circle is separated, a (full) arc is automatically generated from
the circle. In this manner, circles can be shortened (indirectly).(see
"Shortening or extending elements", pg. 176).

Separating an element
Application: if a part of an element is to be deleted

Fig. 4719

1. If required, select All points

.
The start and end points of elements are marked with red
squares (this is helpful when separating elements).
If the end points are also element combining points, the
squares are displayed in green.
2. Select >Modify >Clear >Separate element.
3. Click on the element (P1).
The element is dashed and highlighted in yellow.
4. Click on the point (P2), where the separation is to be made.
or
Enter the coordinates of (P2).
The element is separated.
5. To rebuild the figure: press the <F5> button or select Update
drawing
.

S523EN

2007-04-20

11BClearing geometries

173

Separating two elements at their

intersection
Application: parts of elements are to be deleted

Fig. 4718

1. If required, select All points

.
The start and end points of elements are marked with red
squares (this is helpful when separating elements).
If the end points are also element combining points, the
squares are displayed in green.
2. Select >Modify >Clear >Separate at cutting point.
3. Follow the instructions in the command line.
4. To rebuild the figure: press <F5> or select Update drawing
.

Combining elements
Conditions
Lines that are to be combined must have the same direction or
identical angular position. The end points of the lines must
meet
Two arcs that are to be combined must have the same radius
and center.
Note
It is not possible to combine two lines with different angular
positions or two arcs with different radii and/or different centers.

174

11BClearing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Fig. 4720

1. Select >Modify >Clear >Combine elements.

2. Click on the first element (P1).
The element (P1) is presented in yellow and is dashed.
3. Click on the second element (P2).
Both lines are presented in the original color.

S523EN

2007-04-20

11BClearing geometries

175

12.2 Shortening or extending elements

Shortening or extending an element
TruTops behavior:
The element to be modified is shortened or extended up to the
intersection with a reference point.
If there are two common intersections (e.g. arc), the
intersection that is closest to the first pick point is selected.
The element to be modified is shortened on the side on which
the pick point is not located. The side which was clicked is
retained.
Conditions
The element to be modified must be a line, an arc, a bevel or a
rounding. (During shortening or extending, bevels and
roundings are automatically converted into lines and arcs.)
The reference element can be a line, an arc, a circle, a
rounding, a bevel, an auxiliary line or an auxiliary circle.
Note
If a circle is separated, a (full) arc is automatically generated from
the circle. In this manner, circles can be shortened (indirectly).(see
"Splitting or combining elements", pg. 173)

Reference element

Element to be modified

Clicked pick point

Defining modifications by clicking

176

11BClearing geometries

Fig. 26960

2007-04-20

S523EN

1. Select >Modify >Clear >Shorten/Extend 1. Element.

2. Click on the element side to be retained.
3. Click on the reference element.
The element to be modified is shortened (or extended) up to
the intersection.

Shortening or extending two elements

TruTops behavior:
Both elements are shortened or extended on their common
side.
If there are two common intersections (e.g. arc), the
intersection that is closest to the first pick point is selected.
The two elements to be modified are shortened from the side
on which the pick points are not located. The sides which were
clicked are thus retained.
Conditions
Two elements must have a common (actual or virtual)
intersection.
The element to be modified must be a line, an arc, a bevel or a
rounding. (During shortening or extending, bevels and
roundings are automatically converted into lines and arcs.)
Note
If a circle is separated, a (full) arc is automatically generated from
the circle. In this manner, circles can be shortened (indirectly).(see
"Splitting or combining elements", pg. 173)

S523EN

2007-04-20

11BClearing geometries

177

First element to be modified

Pick point on the first element

Second element to be modified

Pick point on the second

element

Defining a modification by clicking

Fig. 26961

1. Select >Modify >Clear > Shorten/Extend both elements.

2. Either
Click on the first element to be retained.
Click on the second element to be retained.
or
Box in the open contour point of the first and the second
element to be modified using the mouse (display in
TruTops CAD: red).

178

11BClearing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

First element to be modified

Open contour points (red)

Second element to be modified

Frame

Defining modifications by drawing frames

Fig. 26962

The elements are shortened or extended up to their intersection.

S523EN

2007-04-20

11BClearing geometries

179

12.3 Smoothing elements or contours

During smoothing, the existing contours/contour sections are
replaced with new contours/contour sections.
The aim of smoothing is to reduce the number of often
unnecessarily too many single elements of a contour as far as
possible, without deviating too far from the original contour.
Notes
When opening foreign formats from CAD systems, "Smooth
drawing" can be selected through the loading options(see
"Opening foreign formats from CAD systems", pg. 81). If
contours have to be smoothed individually (with different
parameters or several times if required), you can also smooth
them "manually" after loading.
If the number of elements in a contour/a contour section
cannot be reduced further without deviating too far from the
original contour, a corresponding message is displayed in the
message line.

Smoothing elements or contours

1. Open a drawing or create a new one.
2. Select >Modify >Clear >Smooth.
3. Select >Element or >Contour.
The "Smooth parameter" mask is displayed.
Note
You can select from three smoothing types in this mask. The
decisive factor here is, which tab ("General", "Short elements"
or "Arcs") is selected last.
4. To smooth by means of resolution: select "General":

The coarser the resolution, the fewer elements are

required. The new contour section deviates more strongly
from the original contour. The higher the resolution, the
more elements are required. The new contour section is
the closest to the original contour.

The data belonging to the resolution is displayed below in

the mask. You can enter your own values under
"User-defined".
5. To remove short elements from contours: select "Short
elements" and enter the desired values.
The resulting gap is closed by adjusting the neighboring
elements or by a compensating element.

180

11BClearing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

6. To replace several arcs with one arc: select "Arcs" and enter
the maximum deviation.
7. Select OK.
8. One after the other, click on or box in all elements or contours
that are to be smoothed. To smooth all elements or contours:
select All.

S523EN

2007-04-20

11BClearing geometries

181

12.4 Converting narrow contours into lines

Converting rectangles or oblong holes into
lines
Rectangles or oblong holes that are narrower than the laser kerf
can lead to problems with the laser machining. To remedy this, the
closed contours can be replaced by single lines and cut as open
contours.
1. Load a drawing or create a new one.
2. Select >Modify >Clear >Replace slitting contours.
The "Replace slitting contours" mask is displayed.
3. Select the type of contour that is to be replaced with a single
line ("Rectangle" and/or "Oblong holes").
4. Enter the maximum contour width (only rectangles and oblong
holes up to this width are then replaced).

Fig. 46138

5. Select OK.
6. Using the mouse, click on box in contours that are to be
replaced. To replace all contours: select All.
The original contour is colored in red.
7. To conclude, select End.

182

11BClearing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

12.5 Scaling diameter of circles

Scaling diameter of circles
This function is used to round the diameter of circles to the next
value specified by the grid.
Example: The decimal places of the diameter are removed by a
grid of 1 mm.
1. Select >Modify >Clear >Screen circle diameter.
The "Screen circle diameter" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the grid in [mm].
3. Select OK.
4. One after the other, click on or box in circles that are to be
modified.
5. To modify all circles: select All.

12.6 Open contours

Closing open contours
1. Select >Modify >Clear >Close contour.
The "Close open contours" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the maximum distance of the end points of the open
contour in [mm].
3. Select OK.
4. Using the mouse, click on or box in open contours that are to
be closed. To close all contours: select All.

S523EN

2007-04-20

11BClearing geometries

183

12.7 Merging contours

Merging contours
Condition
Contours to be merged must overlap.

Part of the contours to be preserved

Fig. 50217

1. Select >Modify >Clear >Merge contours.

2. Click on the part of the contours to be preserved (pos. 1).
The remaining part of the contours is deleted.

12.8 Converting lines

Converting lines into bevels
1. Select >Modify >Elements >Bevel.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.

184

11BClearing geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

13.

Pasting or modifying texts in

geometries

In TruTops CAD, texts can be pasted or edited in geometries.

Notes
Neither approach flags nor withdrawal flags are created when
cutting texts in '*.FNT' format. The beam pierces directly into
the contour. Processing cannot be rearranged. This can result
in uncontrolled scrap (depending on the font).
In TruTops CAD, text can created and edited with TruTops
own fonts (*.FNT format) or with any true type fonts (*.TTF
format).

13.1 Entering text and defining parameters

Showing set text parameters
mask
Entering text in a single line

1. Select >Create >Special elements >Text.

The "Set text parameters" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the text in the input line.
Example: One-line text.

Entering several lines of text

3. Mark the end of a line with \n.

Example: Several lines of text\nSeveral lines of
text\n.

Defining text parameters

4. Enter the text height, the width/height ratio and the line
spacing.
5. Enter the "angle of inclination".
0 corresponds to vertical characters; positive values incline
the text to the right.
6. Enter the "angle of rotation".
0 corresponds to horizontal lines; positive values rotate the
font counter-clockwise.
"Entry via 2 points": The angle must be defined by means of a
start point and end point before the text is drawn.
7. Select the "font direction".
In case of "right", the characters are arranged next to each
other, and in case of "Bottom", they are arranged one below
the other.
8. Select the "Reference point position".
Determines the position of the cursor at the text.

S523EN

2007-04-20

12BPasting or modifying texts in geometries

185

Selecting fonts (*.FNT) or true

type font file (*.TTF)

Marking text

Standard texts

Notes
Two true type fonts are available in TruTops CAD, which
have been developed especially for machining using
lasers: TC_LaserScript.TTF and TC_LaserSand.TTF.
Both
true
type
fonts
are
stored
in
the
'\TRUMPF.NET\Data' directory during the installation.
Furthermore links to the true type fonts are stored in the
font directory of the Windows version used.
The font group (e.g. true type fonts) can be changed only
as long as the text is being created. You can change to a
font within the same group even if the text has already
been created.
9. Select Select font.
The "Select font" mask is displayed.
10. Select the '*.FNT' or '*.TTF' file type.
11. Mark the desired font.
12. Select OK.
The new font is shown in the "Set text parameters" mask.
Note
The text has the >Characteristic property and automatically
obtains orange color.
13. Select "Mark text".
14. Either
Select OK if all text parameters have been defined.
The text and the reference point are shown if a value has
been entered under "Angle of rotation".
or
Select OK if all text parameters have been defined and
under "Angle of rotation", "Entry via 2 points" has been
selected.
Click on the start and end point.
The angle is now defined. The text and the reference point
are shown.
or
Rotate the text using wheel mouse, position it and click.
The text is drawn at the selected position.
Note
If the stored standard texts are selected, they are added in the
text row and the appropriate text is created after closing the
mask. Here, the standard texts must be previously selected in
the file information ( >File >Properties).
15. Select >Create >Special elements >Text.

186

12BPasting or modifying texts in geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

16. Open the selection field behind the text entry line with .
The "Text selection" mask is displayed.
17. Select text.

Note: Drawing designation from the file information.

User: Name from the file information.

Part number: A text "###" is set using this function, which

is replaced with an unequivocal part number in the nest,
laser or punch. Only one such text can be created for each
part.

Last text: The last selected text is set. A text can also be
searched for from a list of last texts.
18. Select OK.
The text is linked to the cursor.
19. Place the text at the desired position.

13.2 Modifying text parameters

Condition
The drawing contains texts.
1.
2.
3.
4.

S523EN

2007-04-20

Select >Modify >Elements >Text.

Click on the text.
Modify text parameters.
Select OK.

12BPasting or modifying texts in geometries

187

13.3 Creating your own font

The bold.fnt, iso.fnt and isoprop.fnt fonts belong to the standard
scope of TruTops.
To create your own fonts, a reference file and a text font file must
be created.
The names of all of your font files are entered into the reference
file. The text font file itself contains the coordinates of all
characters.
Example:
Condition
A program must be available for editing txt files such as
Notepad, Wordpad or Editor.
Characters

Name of reference file

(prescribed)

Name of font file (arbitrary)

txt editor program (arbitrary)

font.ref

selfdef_font.fnt

Notepad
Tab. 10

Cell height

Cell width

Character length

Character height

Example sketch: Dimensions and coordinates of a

character

Creating reference file

188

Fig. 29052

1. Open Notepad.
An empty page is displayed.
2. Enter 1000 in the first line.
The numbers up to 1000 are reserved for the standard fonts of
TruTops CAD.

12BPasting or modifying texts in geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

Creating font file

3. Enter selfdef_font.fnt in the second line.

4. Select >File >Save as.
5. Under "Save in", change the 'Trumpf.net\Data' directory
(located on the Tops installation drive).
6. As "File type", enter font.ref.
This file name is prescribed. All your other fonts are entered in
this file. Each font obtains a consecutive number 1001, 1002...
A file name must be entered in the line after each number.
7. Select Save.
The reference file is stored in the 'Trumpf.net\Data' directory.
8. In Notepad: select >File >New.
9. Make entries line by line as in the following example.

Example: Entries in Notepad (line

by line)

Meaning

File format description

#~HEADER

Beginning of first block

Beginning of file header

selfdef_font.fnt

Name of font file

40

Cell width

80

Cell height

70

Distance from zero point to the end of

character height

10

Start line of the character without

descender

Number of subsequent characters

0.5

Ratio of cell width to cell height

##~~

End of block

End of file header

#~2

Beginning of character description

Beginning of character

Character to be displayed

Number of groups

#~2.1

Beginning of group

Number of subsequent points

M 10 10

Move to coordinate 10, 10

D 10 60

Draw a line from the coordinate 10,10

to the coordinate 10,60

D15 60

etc.

D 15 15

etc.

D30 15

etc.

S523EN

2007-04-20

12BPasting or modifying texts in geometries

189

Example: Entries in Notepad (line

by line)

Meaning

D30 10

etc.

D10 10

etc.

Close the polygonal contour

I~

End of group description

##~~

End of character description

###~~~EOF

File format description

End of character
End of file

Font file consisting of one character

Tab. 11

10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Select >File >Save as.

Under "Save in", go to the 'Trumpf.net\Data' directory.
As "File type", select '*.txt'.
Under "File name", enter selfdef_font.fnt.
Select >Save.
The font file with the letter L is created and can be used after
restarting TruTops CAD.
Tip
Creating a complete character set is a time-consuming
procedure. Therefore, simply copy and rename a
TruTops CAD text font file. Then overwrite the entries in the file
with your own coordinates and data.

190

12BPasting or modifying texts in geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

14.

Embossed texts

14.1 Creating embossed texts

Embossed texts such as ID numbers can be created in TruTops
and machined on machines which support 10-station or 12-station
Multitools.
Embossed texts are created with a separate mask, have the
"Characteristic" property and are saved as a template (*.VLG). The
function must be switched on in the data.
Two tools are available for embossed texts:
Digital fonts.

Embossed text.

Condition
The fonts have been activated in the Data Management.
Note
TruTops has the numbers 0 to 9 and the alphabets A and E as
characters (only for 12-station multitool). They are saved as a tool.
Example: 'PR_A.wzg'.
1. Select >Tools >Modify data >User >TruTops functionsDigital
fonts or embossed text .
2. Select Exit.
3. Select >File >Execute.
The "Execute user-defined TruTops function" mask is
displayed.
4. Select Digital fonts or embossed text.
The "Digital fonts input" mask is displayed.
5. Enter the distance between the characters, the segment length
and the digital text.
6. Select OK.
7. Enter a point or angle in the input line.
or
Rotating the text using wheel mouse.
8. Position the embossed text and left click.
The embossed text is drawn.

S523EN

2007-04-20

13BEmbossed texts

191

14.2 Using special characters

Example: A slash as a special character.
When entering the embossed text, a place holder must be used
instead of a slash.
As the numbers 0 to 9 and the alphabets A and E (only for
12-station multitool) are available, A can be used as place holder.
Example: 123A456 and not 123/456. In Multitool, the embossed
stamp "A" must be replaced with the embossed stamp "/".
If the embossed text display in TruTops matches the embossed
text, a slash must be drawn and saved as a tool.
1. Draw a slash.
The slash should correspond to the height of a number.
2. Select >Auxiliary tools >Displace zero point.
3. Click on the center of the slash.
4. Select >File >Save as.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
5. Select the '*.WZG' file type.
The TruTops file browser automatically goes to the directory
'\TRUMPF.NET\Data\PunchTools'.
6. Save the drawing with the name PR_s.wzg.
7. Select OK.
"Save tool" is displayed.
8. Select "Punching tool".
9. Select OK.
10. Select Yes to overwrite the file.
The slash is saved under the file name 'PR_s.wzg'. S is the
place holder for the embossed text entry.
11. Select >File >Executeembossed text.
12. Enter the distance between characters.
13. Enter the embossed text with place holder s and select OK.
14. Enter a point or angle in the input line.
or
Rotate the text with the wheel mouse.
15. Position the embossed text and left click.
The embossed text is drawn and the s is displayed as a slash.

192

13BEmbossed texts

2007-04-20

S523EN

15.

Generating geometries in different

variants (optional)

Generated geometries can be flexibly modified with the help of

variants in TruTops CAD. The modifications are controlled by
means of pre-defined variables and expressions.
The following key words are integrated into the variant module.
They cannot be defined as a variable .

S523EN

2007-04-20

abs(x)

Provides the absolute value of a number

acos(x)

Inverse cosine of x

acosh(x)

Hyperbolic inverse cosine of x

and

Logical operation

asin(x)

Arc sine of x

asinh(x)

Hyperbolic arc sine x

atan(x)

Arc tangent of x

atan2(y,x)

atan(y/x)

cos(x)

Cosine of x

cosh(x)

Hyperbolic cosine of x

degrees(x)

Conversion of arc dimensions into degrees

The mathematical constant e == 2.7182...

exp(x)

ex

fabs(x)

Absolute value of the floating point number x

false

Incorrect

False

Incorrect

floor(x)

The value of x rounded down as floating point

number

fmod(x,y)

The value of x module y as floating point number

frexp(x)

Provides Mantissa (numbers before the comma of

an logarithm) and exponent of x as pair (m, e).
Here, m is a floating point number and e is a whole
number, so that x = m*2e.

hypot(x,y)

Euclidean distance _x + y

int(x)

Converts a floating point number into a whole

number

lexp(x,i)

x*2i

log(x)

Natural logarithm of x (base e)

log10(x)

Logarithm of x base 10

max(x)

max(1,2,3) = 3 provides the largest element

min(x)

min(1,2,3) = 1 provides the smallest element

not

Logical operation

or

Logical operation

Pi

The mathematical constant pi = 3.1415

14BGenerating geometries in different variants

(optional)

193

pow(x,y)

x hoch y

radians(x)

Conversion of degrees into arc dimensions

round(x)

Rounding a floating point number

sin(x)

Sine of x

sinh(x)

Hyperbolic sine of x

sqrt(x)

Square root of x

tan(x)

Tangent of x

tanh(x)

Hyperbolic tangent of x

true

true

True

true

Addition

Subtraction

Multiplication

Division

Key words

Tab. 12

15.1 Starting/ending variant module

Note
ive, the relevant icon bar can be opened (under >View).
Starting the variant module

1. Select >Variants >Start.

The variant module is displayed.

Ending the variant module

2. Select >Variants >Exit variants.

The variant module is closed.

194

14BGenerating geometries in different variants

(optional)

2007-04-20

S523EN

15.2 Creating variants

Variants are individual modifications dependent on variables
andVariants can be single parts or entire components.
1. Create or load a drawing.
2. Select >Variants >Generate variant.
The "Variant data" mask is opened.
3. Enter a "designation" for the variant.
If no designation is entered, the designation of the variant type
is automatically adopted.
4. Either
Enter "condition". The variant is executed only if the
condition is fulfilled.
or
Select Variables.
Mark the desired variable.
Select OK (see section "Work with variables").
The selected variable is adopted.
Generating conditions:

Comparison:

Logical operators:

true

true

True

true

false

Incorrect

False

Incorrect

<

smaller than

<=

less than or equal

to

>

greater then

>=

greater than or
equal to

==

(exactly) equal

!=

not the same

and

and

or

or

Conditions

Tab. 13

5. Open selection field with .

6. Select "Variant type".

Move: moving elements and bendings in X and Y direction

Rotate: rotating elements and bendings around an angle.

Mirror: mirroring elements and bendings horizontally or

vertically on a center or two points

Move copy: creating and moving the desired number of

copies of the elements and bendings.

S523EN

2007-04-20

14BGenerating geometries in different variants

(optional)

195

Rotate copy: creating and rotating the desired number of

copies of the elements and bendings.

Mirror copy: creating and mirroring the desired number of

copies of the elements and bendings.

Stretch: stretching elements and bendings horizontally,

vertically or in both directions

Delete: deleting selected elements or bendings

Delete selection: selecting and deleting elements and

bendings according to the color, line type and element type

Modify rounding: entering a new radius for roundings

Modify circle: entering a new diameter for circles

Modify text: entering new contents of a text

Modify bending angle: entering a new bending angle

Set variable: makes it possible to set a variable through a

variant. The variant requires the name and the expression
for the variable (similar to setting in variable management).

Set property: Sets a property of the drawing, e.g. Material

ID. This is practical if values from a variable file are read
out. The text must be in quotation marks, otherwise, it
becomes valid as a text variable.

Cancel variants: Enables canceling of variants. Any text

can be defined, which is output during cancellation. This
variant can be used for checking.

Set template: Adding a *.vlg file at the specified position.

Close contour: Closes the selected contour elements (by

specifying a gap to be closed maximally).
Either
Further parameters can be entered depending on the
selected variant type: Left click in the input field and enter
the desired value or the mathematical formula.
Example: randx - 20 (variable name - old value) or randy loch.cy (border Y - center Y of reference hole). The old
value can be entered either as value or reference here.
or
Select Variables.
Mark the desired variable.
Select OK (see section "Work with variables").
The selected variable is adopted.
Select OK.
One after the other, click on or box in all elements or bendings
whose variants are to be allocated.
Selected elements are displayed in magenta.
Select OK.

7.

8.
9.

10.

196

14BGenerating geometries in different variants

(optional)

2007-04-20

S523EN

15.3 Undoing variants

Select >Variants >Undo step or >Undo all.
The last executed variants or all the variants so far are undone.
With >Undo all, the program returns to its original state.

15.4 Executing variants

Select >Variants >Execute step or >Execute all.
The last undone or all undone variants are executed again.

15.5 Selecting overview of variants

1. Open the selection field with in the icon bar.
All variants of the drawing are displayed.
2. Mark the variant.
The variant is displayed in the selection and all the variants
before it are executed.
or
Mark Final condition.
All variants are executed.

S523EN

2007-04-20

14BGenerating geometries in different variants

(optional)

197

15.6 Allocating a variant to an element or a

bending
Condition
One or more variants have been created and one variant is
active.
1. Select >Variants >Select elements.
2. One after the other, click on or box in the elements in the
drawing.
Selected elements are displayed in magenta.
3. Select OK.

15.7 Adopting element selection of an

existing variant
Condition
One or more variants have been created.
Note
TruTops makes a note of the adoption, i.e. if all elements of the
previous variant are adopted and the selection of this variant is
modified later, the selection of the current variant also changes.
1. To execute a series of actions on the same elements: select
>Variants >Adopting elements.
2. If the previous variant contains copied elements, the "Transfer
elements from predecessor" mask is displayed.
3. Select "Element selection""Originals".
Only original elements of the previous variant are adopted.
or
Select "Element selection""Copy".
Only copied elements of the previous variant are adopted.

198

14BGenerating geometries in different variants

(optional)

2007-04-20

S523EN

15.8 Example
Create variables (manage
variables)

Fig. 51516

1.
2.
3.
4.

As "Name", enter teilx.

For "Expression", enter 500.
Select Set.
Enter the further variables.

Variable name

Variable expression

teily

200

klx

30

kly

30
Tab. 14

Generating variants

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

S523EN

2007-04-20

As "designation", enter long.

As "Condition", enter true.
As "Variant type", select Stretch.
Select "Horizontal".
Select Variable.
Mark the desired variable teilx.
Select OK.
Teilx is adopted
Before teilx, enter -300.
Box in elements that are to be stretched in the X direction.
The elements that are boxed in are displayed in magenta.
Select OK.
The geometry is stretched in the X direction.
Follow the same steps for the Y direction.
As "designation", enter klinkx1.

14BGenerating geometries in different variants

(optional)

199

17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.

200

As "Condition", enter true.

As "Variant type", select Stretch.
Select "Horizontal".
Select Variable.
Mark the desired variable klx.
Select OK.
Klx is adopted
Before klx, enter -30.
Box in the notch element.
The element that is boxed in is displayed in magenta.
Select OK.
The notch is stretched in the X direction.
As "designation", enter klinkx2.
As "Condition", enter true.
As "Variant type", select Stretch.
Select "Horizontal".
Enter - (klx-30).
Box in the notch element.
The element that is boxed in is displayed in magenta.
Select OK.
The notch is stretched in the X direction.

14BGenerating geometries in different variants

(optional)

2007-04-20

S523EN

16.

Working with variables and reference

elements

16.1 Creating and processing variables

Creating a variable

Note
Variables with no value cannot be performed in variants.
1. Select >Variables >Manage variables.
The "Variables" mask is displayed.

Fig. 41125EN

2. Enter a name for the variable under "Name".

3. Enter "Expression".
The expression can consist of simple digits and contain
arithmetic operations or mathematical functions. Further
variables can also be used in the expression, they must be
nearer to the top of the list however.
Example:
Name:

fakt2

Expression:

fakt1*3 (fakt1=5)

Value:

15
Tab. 15

Name:

fakt3

Expression:

fakt4

Value:

- (no value)

Example for variant without value

S523EN

2007-04-20

15BWorking with variables and reference elements

Tab. 16

201

Changing a variable

Changing the sequence of

variables

202

4. To use a reference element in an expression: select Reference

(see "Working with reference elements").
5. The "Define reference value" mask is displayed.
6. Open selection field with .
7. Select the name of the reference element from the list.
8. Select the "desired value".
Values which are not permissible for the selected reference
element are grayed out.
9. Select OK.
The reference is linked to the expression.
10. Select Set.
The entries are adopted in the upper list.
11. Mark a variable in the selection.
Only the expression of a variable can be modified.
12. Modify the expression for the variable.
13. Select Set.
The modifications are adopted, the position of the variable in
the list is preserved.
14. Mark variables.
15. Use the arrow keys to move the variable upwards or
downwards ((see "Fig. 41125EN", pg. 201)).

15BWorking with variables and reference elements

2007-04-20

S523EN

16.2 Importing variables

If foreign variables are to be imported (e.g. from SAP), the
structure of these variables must correspond to that of the TruTops
CAD variables.
Conditions
The files are ASCII files.
The entry per variable is: variable = expression (e.g. x = a + b).
1. To import an existing list with variables, select "List of
variables"Import.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
2. If necessary, go to the directory in which the variables are
managed.
3. Mark the list with variables.
4. Select OK.
The new variables are adopted and set at the beginning of the
selection.

16.3 Exporting variables

1. Select "List of variables"Export if the variables are to be
exported.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
2. If necessary, go to the directory in which the variables are
managed.
3. Mark the desired file.
or
Enter the file name.
4. Select OK.

16.4 Deleting variables

1. Mark the variable to be deleted.
2. Select Delete.
The variable is deleted.

S523EN

2007-04-20

15BWorking with variables and reference elements

203

16.5 Setting reference element

A reference element is used to allocate a name to an element or a
bending. This reference can then be used for conditions and
parameters with variants or for expressions of variables.
Reference elements can be used to use values of an element (e.g.
radius, length) or a bending in an expression. You only have to
enter the name of the reference element, followed by a point and
then a code:

sx: x coordinate of the start point

sy: y coordinate of the start point
ex: x coordinate of the end point
ey: y coordinate of the end point
cx: x coordinate of the center
cy: y coordinate of the center
r: radius
d: diameter
l: length

Example: To obtain the length of a reference element with the

name Line, enter the expression Line.I.
Condition
A drawing is loaded.
1. Select >Variants >Set reference element.
The "Define reference element" mask is displayed.
2. Enter a name for the reference element.
3. Select OK.
4. Click on the reference element in the drawing.
The reference element obtains the "Characteristic" property and is
displayed in orange if Highlight characteristics is selected.

16.6 Removing a reference element

1. Select >Variants >Remove reference element if the reference
element is to be removed again.
2. Click on the reference element.
The "characteristic" property is removed from the element.

204

15BWorking with variables and reference elements

2007-04-20

S523EN

16.7 Showing reference element

Condition
A drawing with set reference elements is loaded.
1. Select >Variants >Show reference element.
2. Click on reference elements one after the other.
or
Select All to display all reference elements.
The names of the reference elements are displayed.

S523EN

2007-04-20

15BWorking with variables and reference elements

205

17.

Managing variants

17.1 Positioning variants

1. Select >Variants >Manage variants.
The "Variants" mask is displayed.
2. Mark the desired variant in the list.
The ID of the current variant is displayed under the selection
field.
3. The position of the variants in the list can be modified using the
arrows.
The position of the variant corresponds to the sequence in which
the variant is performed.

17.2 Creating new variants

Select Create.
The "Variant data" mask is displayed. The new variant is set at the
highest position. Elements can be allocated for this later (see
section "Allocating variants to an element").

17.3 Copying variants

1. Mark any variant.
2. Select Copy.
The copied variant has the same parameters or conditions and the
same elements selection as the original variant.

17.4 Modifying variants

1. Mark the variant to be modified.
The "Variant data" mask is displayed.
2. Modify any parameter.
3. Select OK.

206

16BManaging variants

2007-04-20

S523EN

17.5 Deleting variants

1. Mark the variant to be deleted.
2. Select Delete.
3. Select OK.
The last selected variant is adopted.

17.6 Executing variants several times

1. Select Loop.
The "Variant data" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the required parameter.
Example: Loop variable counter runs from 1 to 25.
3. Select OK.
The loop is introduced in the "Variants" mask in place of the variant
that was last marked. The previously marked variant is placed in
the loop.
All variants belonging to the loop are moved in closer together.
Further variants can be allocated to the loop or can be removed
from it using the arrow. The loop is dissolved through Dissolve.
Loops can also be placed in loops. Loops can thus be nested in
any desired manner.

S523EN

2007-04-20

16BManaging variants

207

17.7 Saving geometry with variant as *.GMV

A GMV file contains the geometry and the variants. It is
independent of a Geo file that has been used as the basis. No
geometry preparation is made when saving the file. GMV files
cannot be nested or further processed.
Condition
A variant has been created or modified.
1. Select >File >Save as.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
2. Select '*.GMV' file type.
3. Enter the file name (without file extension).
4. Select OK.
The drawing is saved as a geometry with variant in the '*.GMV'
format. There are no other saving options, i.e. no other formats.

17.8 Exporting variant as *.GEO

Condition
A variant (*.GMV) has been loaded.
Note
Intermediate statuses can also be saved. To export the end status,
it is important that all variants be executed up to the end status.
1. Select >File >Export Geo.
The TruTops CAD file browser is displayed.
2. Go to the directory in which the '*.GEO' file is to be exported.
3. Change the file name if required.
4. Select OK.
The file is saved in the '*.GEO' format.

208

16BManaging variants

2007-04-20

S523EN

17.9 Exporting variants to Excel

The list of variables can be exported from a GMV file into Excel,
modified there and re-imported into TruTops CAD as a new
drawing variant.
Conditions
A '*.GMV' has been loaded.
The Excel program is installed.
Saving a file in XLS format

Opening an XLS file

1. Select >File >Execute.

The "Execute user-defined TruTops functions" mask is
displayed.
2. Select GMV XLS.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
3. Save the file under the current '*.GMV' name.
or
Enter the new name under "File name".
4. Select OK.
The file is saved in '*.XLS' format.
5. Select >File >File browser.
or
Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM browser.
6. Go to the directory containing the '*.XLS' file.
7. Double-click on the '*.XLS' file.
The XLS file opens. The designations of the variables are
adopted directly from the GMV file.

Fig. 44141DE

Creating further variants

S523EN

2007-04-20

8. To create further variants, copy line 2.

9. Paste the copied line repeatedly into the following lines until
you have the desired number of variants.

16BManaging variants

209

Designation of the variables

outputgeo: storage location of

the new geometries (*.GEO,
by default the same directory
which contains the GMV file
as well).

mastergmv: storage location

of the output file (*.GMV)
Fig. 44139EN

10. Go to the copied line to be modified.

11. Enter a new value.
12. For every new variant in the " outputgeo" (3) column, change
the "File name" and/or the path for the deposit site, e.g. add an
ascending number to the file name.
13. Save the file.
14. Close Excel.

210

16BManaging variants

2007-04-20

S523EN

17.10 Importing variants from Excel

Creating a *.GEO from *.XLS

1. Select >File >Execute.

The "Execute user-defined TruTops functions" mask is
displayed.
2. Select XLS GEO.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
3. Double-click on the desired file ('*.XLS').
From the '*.XLS' file, a new '*.GEO' file is created for each
variant and a log with all variants is displayed.

Variant protocol

Opening a variant with Geo

Viewer

S523EN

2007-04-20

Fig. 44140

4. To display the created drawings, double-click on the desired

drawing in the "outputgeo" column.
TruTops CAD opens the Geo Viewer with the selected GEO.
5. Close the Geo Viewer with OK.
6. Select >File >Open to open the drawing in TruTops CAD.
7. Go to the directory containing the '*.GEO' file.
8. Mark the drawing and select OK.

16BManaging variants

211

18.

Comparing geometries with one

another (geometry comparator)

The elements of two drawings can be compared with one another

in TruTops CAD. The differences can also be displayed.
The drawings can be in the TruTops formats *.GEO and *.VLG or
in the foreign formats *.DXF, *.MI, *.IGS or *.GRA.
Notes
This function is not available in TruTops Tube.
Actions cannot be undone in the geometry comparator (no
Undo).
Reference drawing and comparison drawing are automatically
prepared prior to the inspection.

18.1 Opening and closing geometry

comparator
Opening the geometry
comparator
Closing geometry
comparator

212

1. Select >Assistants >Start comparison.

The geometry comparator is opened and the function browser
is adapted.
2. Select >Assistants >Compare >Exit comparison.
The current drawing is displayed again.

17BComparing geometries with one another

(geometry comparator)

2007-04-20

S523EN

18.2 Comparing a reference drawing and a

comparison drawing with one another
Note
If a drawing is created or loaded in the "normal" mode and the
geometry comparator is then opened, TruTops CAD automatically
selects the current drawing as reference drawing.
Loading reference drawing

Loading comparison drawing

1. Either
Select >File >Open reference.
Select the file format and change the directory if required.
Mark the desired file and select OK.
or
Open the list of last loaded files in the mask head with .
The path and the name of the reference drawing is displayed in
the mask head.
2. Select >File >Open comparison.
3. Select the file format and change the directory if required.
4. Mark the desired file and select OK.
The comparison drawing is linked to the mouse.
Notes
The reference drawing and the comparison drawing must
be congruent, on top of each other. The position of the
comparison drawing can be corrected using Move
comparison part and Rotate comparison part (moving and
rotating are self-holding.) The reference drawing cannot be
moved.
Comparison drawings can be loaded as often as desired.
Each comparison drawing replaces the previous one.
When a new reference drawing is loaded, TruTops CAD
removes the comparison drawing.
5. Enter the target point or angle of the comparison drawing or
position the comparison drawing with the mouse.

Setting comparison colors

S523EN

2007-04-20

6. Select >Assistants >Compare >Reference, comparison color or

>color of shared elements.
7. Select color.

Reference color: highlights deviating elements in the

reference drawing.

Comparison color: highlights deviating elements in the

comparison drawing.

Color of shared elements: Displays all shared elements of

the drawings in the selected color.

17BComparing geometries with one another

(geometry comparator)

213

Extending comparison to line

color and line type

8. Select >Assistants >Compare >Calculate >Parameters.

The "Compare drawings" mask is displayed.
9. Select "Consider color" and/or "Consider line type".
10. Select OK.
11. Under "Execute", select Start to start the geometry comparator.
or
Select >Assistants >Compare >Calculate >Start.
The elements of both the drawings are compared. If the
comparison drawing is moved using >Move or >Rotate, the
comparison is automatically updated.

18.3 Merging a reference drawing with a

comparison drawing
Select >Assistants >Compare >Merge.
The two parts are merged into one.

18.4 Deleting a reference drawing or a

comparison drawing
Select >Assistants >Compare >Delete reference part or
>comparison part.

214

17BComparing geometries with one another

(geometry comparator)

2007-04-20

S523EN

19.

Dimensioning geometries

Dimensionings show sizes, lengths or other dimensions of objects

in a drawing.
The dimensioning in TruTops CAD offers the following functions:
Dimensionings are dynamic objects that automatically
recalculate their dimensions when they are scaled, rotated,
moved or angled.
Dimensionings are displayed in yellow by default so that they
can be distinguished from the measured points.
A dimensioning text can be added before and after the
dimensioning.
Various parameters e.g. font height, tolerances... can be
defined for the dimensioning value.
The dimensioning is saved.
Dimensioning is adopted when loading foreign formats from
CAD systems. The dimensioning can be processed.

19.1 Showing and hiding dimensionings

1. To display the dimensionings, select the Show dimensioning
symbol (press the button).
2. To hide the dimensioning, select the pressed Show
dimensioning symbol again.

19.2 Dimensioning lines

Condition
A drawing is loaded.
1. Select >Dimensioning.
2. Select the >Elements area of application, for example.

Elements: to dimension an element on the part.

Contours: to dimension a contour.

2 points: to dimension the distance between two points.

Short: to dimension the distance between two points. Only

the end point is dimensioned.

Axis: to dimension the distance of a point from the X or Y

axis.

S523EN

2007-04-20

18BDimensioning geometries

215

3. Select the alignment of dimensioning.

Horizontal: The dimensioning can be created only

horizontally.

Vertical: The dimensioning can be created only vertically.

Arbitrary: Dimensioning can be created (aligned) in any

direction on the dimensioned element or the dimensioned
points. To do this, define the specified angle in the input
line.

Aligned: The dimensioning can be created by aligning on

the dimensioned element or the dimensioned points (not
for >Contours area of application).
4. For >Elements/Contours, click on or box in part(s).
5. For >Points, click on the start and end points.
The distance between two points is dimensioned.
6. For >Short, click on the start and end points.
The distance between two points is also dimensioned.
Dimensioning is however displayed differently and only the end
point is dimensioned.
Note
When several dimensionings are created, then the start point
always remains the same and the end point is redefined each
time. The >Short area of application is suitable for
dimensioning several elements in a compact manner. The start
point must be easy to recognize (e.g. bottom left corner).
7. For >Axis: click on the line (rectangle) or point on the circle.
In case of rectangles, the distance of a line (element) to the X
or Y axis is dimensioned. In case of circles, the distance from
the center of the circle to the respective axis is dimensioned.
8. Position the dimensioning as desired.
The dimensioning is displayed.

216

18BDimensioning geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

19.3 Dimensioning circles, radii, arc lengths

Condition
A drawing is loaded.
Dimensioning diameter

Dimensioning radii

Arc length dimensioning

Note
When dimensioning the diameter, the diameter of a circle, an
arc, or a rounding is dimensioned.
1. Select >Dimension >Circles / radii >Diameter.
2. Mark the element to be dimensioned.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
3. Place the dimensioning in the desired position.
The dimensioning is displayed at the circle.
Note
When dimensioning the radius, the radius of a circle, an arc or
a rounding is dimensioned.
4. Select >Dimension >Circles / radii >Radius.
5. Mark the element to be dimensioned.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
6. Place the dimensioning in the desired position.
The dimensioning is displayed in the circle.
Note
When dimensioning the arc lengths, the length of an arc or a
rounding is dimensioned.
7. Select >Dimension >Circles / radii >Arc length.
8. Mark the element to be dimensioned.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
9. Place the dimensioning in the desired position.
The dimensioning is displayed at the arc.

S523EN

2007-04-20

18BDimensioning geometries

217

19.4 Dimensioning an angle

When dimensioning the angle, the angle between two lines is
dimensioned. Both lines do not have to intersect.
Condition
A drawing is loaded.
1. Select >Dimension >Angle >Angle.
2. Mark the first line for the dimensioning.
3. Mark the second line for the dimensioning.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
4. Select the angle to be dimensioned.
5. Place the dimensioning in the desired position.
The angle dimensioning is displayed.

19.5 Moving dimensioning

An existing dimensioning can be repositioned at any time. When
dimensioning angles, the angle to be dimensioned is defined by
the position.
Condition
A dimensioned drawing is loaded.
1. Select >Dimension >Modify >Move dimensioning.
2. Click on the existing dimensioning.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
3. Place the dimensioning in the desired position.

218

18BDimensioning geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

19.6 Adapting dimensioning text

The following parameters for modifying the dimensioning text can
be defined in the "Dimensioning text" mask.

Calculated dimensioning value:

Adopt.

Ignore and enter a new value using the displayed

calculator.

Ignore and enter a new value in the input line

Tolerances: the tolerances to be displayed are defined here.

Text: define text before and after the dimensioning value.
Tolerance values: define upper and lower tolerance.
Select the font direction.
Define the font height.

Condition
A dimensioned drawing is loaded.
Modifying a dimensioning
text
Moving the dimensioning text

1. Select >Dimension >Modify >Modify text.

2. Mark the dimensioning text to be modified.
The "Dimensioning text " mask is displayed.
3. Select >Dimension >Modify >Move text.
4. Select dimensioning text.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
Note
As long as the dimensioning text is touching the dimensioning
line, text will appear on the line. Otherwise, a comment line is
drawn between the text and the dimensioning line to allow the
dimensioning text to be allocated to the dimensioning.
5. Place the dimensioning text in the desired position.

Changing the size

S523EN

2007-04-20

6.
7.
8.
9.

Select >Dimension >Modify >Text size.

Enter the new text size in the input line.
Press .
Mark the texts to be modified.
or
Select All.
The text size is modified.

18BDimensioning geometries

219

Changing the text alignment

10. Select >Dimension >Modify >Text alignment.

The "Text alignment" mask is displayed.
11. Select the font direction.

Right: horizontal alignment.

High: vertical, upwards.

Low: vertical, downwards.

12. Mark the texts to be modified.
or
Select All.
The text alignment is modified.

19.7 Setting the dimensioning format

Condition
A dimensioned drawing is loaded.
1. Select >Dimension >Modify >Parameters >Format.
The "Dimensioning format" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the number of digits after the decimal point :

Dimensioning value

Tolerances
3. Enter the length of the arrow tip.
The formats for all dimensionings are modified.

19.8 Deleting dimensioning

You can delete individual dimensionings or all dimensionings at
once.
Condition
A dimensioned drawing is loaded.
1. Select >Dimension >Delete dimensioning.
2. Click on the dimensionings that are to be deleted one after the
other.
or
Select All.
The dimensionings are deleted.

220

18BDimensioning geometries

2007-04-20

S523EN

19.9 Setting standard text size

1. Select >Dimension >Modify >Parameters >Text size.
The "Standard values for dimensionings" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the value for the text height.
3. Select OK.
All texts are displayed with this value.

S523EN

2007-04-20

18BDimensioning geometries

221

20.

Preparing geometries for machining

With the preparation, the direction and sequence of machining for

geometries can be defined during drawing itself.
The preparation is taken into account when loading and machining
the geometry in TruTops Laser.

20.1 Loading and preparing geometries

1. Select >File >Prepare.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
2. If necessary, switch to the directory in which the drawings are
to be managed.
3. Mark the desired file.
or
Enter the file name.
4. Select OK.
The drawing with preparation is automatically displayed.
Meaning of colors and symbols during preparation:
Color

Symbol/Line type

Meaning

Green

Star

Start point of machining on the contour

Green

Line type: solid

Machining direction

Yellow

Line type: solid

Positioning paths between the contours

Blue

Line type: solid

Positioning path to the outer contour or the

end point

Red

Star

Start point of machining

Meaning of colors and symbols during preparation

222

19BPreparing geometries for machining

Tab. 17

2007-04-20

S523EN

20.2 Changing the processing sequence of

prepared geometries
The machining sequence within the parts can be changed through
>Positioning sequence or >Rearrange:
Individual contours can be rearranged and positions for insertions
can be preassigned with >Rearrange. The existing, possibly
optimized processing sequence is retained through >Rearrange.
Only the selected contour is set at another machining position.
Entire groups or all contours can be rearranged at once through
>Positioning sequence.
In both cases, linear traverse path are generated.
Modifying processing
sequence arbitrarily

Notes
All modifications are lost if a new suggestion is calculated
for the preparation after the processing sequence is
changed.
Always process outer contours last.
1. Load and prepare a geometry.
2. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Modify positioning sequence.
3. Click on the contour from which the positioning sequence
should be modified.
4. Using the mouse, click on or box in further contours in the
sequence in which they are to be machined.
5. To automatically arrange the remaining positioning sequence,
select >Assistants >Prepare >Positioning sequence path
optimized.
6. Select End.

Setting a particular contour

at the beginning of
machining

Notes
All modifications are lost if a new proposal is calculated for
the preparation after the processing sequence is changed.
Always process outer contours last.
7. Load and prepare a geometry.
8. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Rearrange at the beginning.
9. Click on the Contour.
Set the clicked object at the beginning of machining. The rest
of the processing sequence remains unchanged.

Setting a particular contour

at the end of machining

S523EN

2007-04-20

Notes
All modifications are lost if a new proposal is calculated for
the preparation after the processing sequence is changed.
Always process outer contours last.

19BPreparing geometries for machining

223

10. Load and prepare a geometry.

11. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Rearrange at the end.
12. Click on the contour.
The clicked object is set at the end of machining. The rest of
the processing sequence remains unchanged.
Machining contours
specifically before or after
others

Notes
This function can be used to machine a contour specifically
before or after another one. The remaining processing
sequence is not recalculated then.
All modifications are lost if a new proposal is calculated for
the preparation after the processing sequence is changed.
Always process outer contours last.
13. Load and prepare a geometry.
14. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Rearrange before or
>Rearrange after.
15. Click on the contour before/after which the other contour is to
be arranged.
16. Click on the contour after/before which the other contour is to
be arranged.
The existing, possibly optimized processing sequence is
retained and only the picked contour is set at the desired
position in the processing sequence.

20.3 Modifying start points for machining

The following can be done using this function:
Displacing the start point of machining manually.
Inverting the direction of machining.
Recalculating the start point.
Note
All modifications are lost if a new proposal is calculated for the
preparation after the processing sequence is changed.
Displacing start point
arbitrarily

224

1. Load and prepare a geometry.

2. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Displace start point.
3. Using a mouse, click on or box in the desired start point on the
contour.
4. Select End.
The existing processing sequence is retained and only the
picked start point is set at the desired position.

19BPreparing geometries for machining

2007-04-20

S523EN

Inverting start points

Recalculating all start points

5. Select >Invert start point.

6. Click on the contour at which the machining is to be inverted.
7. Select >Calculate start point.
All start points are recalculated.

20.4 Selecting preferred direction

The preferred (machining) direction can be defined in X or Y
direction for the preparation of the geometry.
Note
All modifications are lost if a new proposal is calculated for the
preparation after the processing sequence is changed.
1. Load and prepare a geometry.
2. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Calculate >Parameters.
The "Prepare parameters" mask is displayed.
3. Moving the controller in X direction: the contours are machined
line by line.
or
Moving the controller in Y direction: the contours are
machined column by column.

20.5 Defining contour start

The following can be done using this function:
Approaching a corner = approach tangentially
Approaching an element = approach vertically
Note
All modifications are lost if a new proposal is calculated for the
preparation after the processing sequence is changed.
1. Load and prepare a geometry.
2. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Calculate >Parameters.
The "Prepare parameters" mask is displayed.
3. Select "Contour start""Corner" or "Element".
4. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Calculate >Start.
The contour start is displaced to the selected position.

S523EN

2007-04-20

19BPreparing geometries for machining

225

20.6 Preferring contours

It makes sense to machine contours which are at risk of tilting first.
Note
All modifications are lost if a new proposal is calculated for the
preparation after the processing sequence is changed.
1. Load and prepare a geometry.
2. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Calculate >Parameters.
The "Prepare parameters" mask is displayed.
3. To define the maximum contents of surfaces for contours to be
processed first:
Select Determine by picking.
Click on the contour.
Select >Start.
or
Enter the maximum area up to which contours are to be
processed first under "Area until".
Select OK.

20.7 Recalculating preparation

If manual modifications have been made in the preparation and
you want to undo them or modify the settings (e.g. preferred
direction, contour start), a new suggestion can be calculated for
the preparation.
1. Load and prepare a geometry.
2. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Calculate >Start.
The preparation of all contours is recalculated.

20.8 Saving a prepared geometry

1. Load and prepare a geometry.
2. Either
Select >File >Save.
or
Select >File >Save as....

226

19BPreparing geometries for machining

2007-04-20

S523EN

The TruTops file browser is displayed. This displays the

'*.geo' file format, which cannot be modified.
Change the file name if required.
Select OK.
The geometry is saved as '*.geo' with preparation.
The preparation is taken into account when loading and machining
the single part in TruTops Laser.

S523EN

2007-04-20

19BPreparing geometries for machining

227

21.

Bending lines

21.1 Creating bending lines

Condition
The drawing must contain a colored line (e.g. cyan).
Notes
Bending lines are automatically adjusted to the contour.
The pre-angle applies to pre-bending if the Pre-bending and
post-bending technique is selected. The opening angle
corresponds to the end angle.
The bending radius is important for display. If the notches are
not large enough, a small bending radius must be selected,
since otherwise problems occur when creating the bending
part (as long as this edge is not contacted).
Geometries should not have drawing parts outside the
unfolding and the bending lines. If foreign format such as IGS,
DXF are imported, the drawing frames, views, fonts, etc. must
be removed from the drawing.
When selecting the bending tools, the selection can be limited
further to material and thickness due to a TruTops bending
tooling list.
Fist formula for bending radius: notch and sheet thickness
should be greater than the bending radius.
1. Select >Bend >Bending >Create.
The "Define bending lines" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the appropriate values.

"Bending radius": The bending radius is limited to the tool

radius.

"Bend factor": Not converted for acute angles.

3. Select upperand lower tools.
4. Select "Bending type", "Bending technique" and "Bending
method".

Folding(bending type): 180 for opening angle and

preangle.
5. Select OK.
6. Click on the line drawn in cyan.
The line is defined as a bending line and displayed by the program
in green.

228

20BBending lines

2007-04-20

S523EN

21.2 Allocating bending information

Bending information is not adopted. It must be allocated.
Exception: files in '*.MI' format from SheetAdvisor.
Note
Files in the '*.DXF', '*.IGS', '*.MI' or '*.GRA' formats can also be
read in TruTops CAD. In this case the bend factors with which the
model was created must be entered and converted later in
TruTops Bend. The upper tool and lower tool should also be
entered.
1. Select >File >Properties.
2. Enter part ID, material ID, material thickness etc.
The latter two must be entered.
3. Select OK.
4. Select >File >Save.
or
Select >File >Save as if a name is to be given to the
program.

21.3 Modifying bending lines

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select >Bend >Bending >Modify.

Click on the bending line to be modified.
Enter the modifications in the "Define bending lines" mask.
Select OK.

The modifications are adopted.

21.4 Marking bending lines

This function can be used to mark the ends or the entire bending
lines. This is necessary to be able to correct bending lines that are
unfavorably located in the part.
1. Select >Bend >Bending >Mark.
The "Mark bending lines" mask is displayed.
2. Select the length of the marking or the entire bending line.
3. Select OK.

S523EN

2007-04-20

20BBending lines

229

4. Click on the bending line.

or
Select All if all the bending lines are to be marked.
The selected bending lines are displayed in orange.

21.5 Adopting bending tools

Tool data can be transferred from one bending to other bendings.
1. Select >Bend >Bending >Adopt tools.
2. Click on the bending line from which tools are to be transferred
(reference bending line).
3. Click on the bending lines which are to obtain the machining of
the reference bending line.
or
Press All.
The data is modified for all bending lines.

21.6 Unfolding bending profile

Bending parts with a rectangular unfolding and parallel bendings
can also be drawn simply in the form of the desired profile after
bending, with and without bending radii.
With the >Unfolding function, the profile can then be converted into
an unfolding drawing.

Profile drawing

Fig. 24586

1. Select >Bend >Profile >Unfold.

230

20BBending lines

2007-04-20

S523EN

2. Enter "Material name", "Material thickness" and "Profile depth"

(width of the unfolding part).
3. Enter "Upper tool group" and "Lower tool group".
The tool groups are required in order to determine appropriate
tools and the respective bend factors.
4. Select OK.
5. To define the placement of profile materials:

Click on a line element of the profile.

Click next to the element in the direction in which the

material can be found.
The profile is replaced by the respective unfolding.

21.7 Creating a bending profile

Bending profiles can be created to check and modify an unfolding
drawing. If the bending part contains inside contours, they are
deleted.
The outer contour is still rectangular during reunfolding.
1. Select >Bend >Profile >Fold.
2. Enter the "Material name" and Material thickness .
3. Select whether the profile is to be on the "upper side" or the
"lower side" of the bending part.
4. Select "With radii" if the profile is to contain bending radii.
5. Select OK.
6. Click on a suitable bending line.
The bending direction and cross-section are defined for the
desired profile.
The profile is created at a right angle to the selected bending line.
All bendings which are parallel to the selected bending line are
taken into account.

S523EN

2007-04-20

20BBending lines

231

21.8 Creating a profile as auxiliary geometry

The created profile can be displayed as auxiliary geometry in the
current drawing.
Note
Bending lines are separated automatically. They do not need to be
separated manually. The only exception is if the outer contour is
not closed.
1. Define bending line.
2. Select >Bend >Profile >Fold.
The "Create bending profile" mask is displayed.
3. Select "Create profile as auxiliary geometry".
4. Select OK.
5. Follow the instructions in the command line.
The profile is added as auxiliary geometry.

21.9 Creating bumping (round bending)

Round bendings can be created at the corner points in the >Bend
menu. Either the corner points are clicked directly or the two
following segments are clicked.
Notes
Bumping bendings can be created only in a profile.
In order to modify round bendings, they must first be deleted
and then recreated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Open a profile.
Select >Bend >Profile >Create bumping.
Enter the number of segments.
Enter the radius.
Select OK or press .
Click on the end points.

The round bending is created.

232

20BBending lines

2007-04-20

S523EN

Round bending with auxiliary geometry

Fig. 31039

21.10 Showing material

Note
The material thickness is indicated by the second profile. The
points of this profile cannot be caught or modified. The second
profile is automatically adapted each time the first profile is
changed.
1. Select >Bend >Profile >Show material.
2. Use the cursor to click on the side of the profile, which is to be
thickened.
The profile is thickened.

S523EN

2007-04-20

20BBending lines

233

22.

Creating profiles

22.1 Creating
Profile drawings (side view of a bending part) can be created in the
>Profile menu in TruTops CAD. The profile can be subsequently
unfolded in the >Bending menu.
1. Select >Bend >Profile >Create.
The command line indicates the next entry to be made.
2. Click on the start point.
or
Enter the start point using the keyboard, e.g. 0,0.
The start point is displayed in yellow.
3. Press .
4. Enter the angle or the length of the line segment.
5. Repeat the previous steps till the profile is complete.

22.2 Creating line through XY

Note
This function can be selected only if a profile has been recently
defined using >Bend >Profile >Create.

Length of line segment

Vertical

Opening angle (relative angle)

Horizontal
Fig. 31038

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

234

21BCreating profiles

Select >Bend >Profile >Create.

Enter the start point of the profile.
Select >Bend >Profile >XY.
Enter the horizontal length.
Press .

2007-04-20

S523EN

6. Enter the vertical length.

7. Press .
The line segment is drawn.
8. Create further segments till the profile is complete.

22.3 Creating bumping

A round bend approximated by several line segments is referred to
as a bumping.
The angle of the line segment is used as start angle if the round
bending is connected to a line segment. All dimensions before and
after a round bending refer to the intersection of the tangent. This
means that the preceding line segment is adapted (shortened)
when creating the round bending (radius is taken into account).
The round bending is defined by the:
Number of segments
Radius.
Start and end angles
Note
This function can be selected only if a profile has been recently
defined using >Bend >Profile >Create.

Point of intersection of the tangent

Fig. 31048

S523EN

2007-04-20

21BCreating profiles

235

Shortening (Create function)

Round bending, shortening

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Fig. 31065

Select >Bend >Profile >Create.

Enter the start point of the profile.
Draw a line segment.
Select >Bend >Profile >Bumping.
Enter the angle.
Press .
Enter the number of segments.
Press .
Enter the radius.
Press .

The round bending is drawn.

22.4 Creating folding

Notes
This function can be selected only if a profile has been recently
defined using >Bend >Profile >Create.
In contrast to the round bending, for the folding, the
dimensions of the joined line segments refer to the radius end.
It is not possible to enter a radius with a value of 0. The lowest
possible radius entry is : 0.01.
The direction of the folding can also be entered with a positive
or negative numerical value.
Through absolute angle entry, it is determined whether the
angle entered when creating the profile must be measured
absolutely or relatively to the last profile segment .

236

21BCreating profiles

2007-04-20

S523EN

Length of the following lines

Folding

Fig. 31049

Direction of folding

Fig. 31058

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select >Bend >Profile >Create.

Enter the start point of the profile.
Draw a line segment.
Select >Bend >Profile >Folding.
A parallel line to the preceding line element appears.
5. Either
Select the direction of the folding by pulling the line to the
desired side.
or
Click in the command line.
Enter the radius.
Press .
Select the side of folding.
6. Left click.
The arc of the folding is drawn.
The distance of the parallel line to the preceding line segment
is the diameter of the folding.
7. Enter the length of the following line segment.
The line segment is drawn.

S523EN

2007-04-20

21BCreating profiles

237

23.

Drawing a bending tool

Note
TruTops Bend needs a drawing of the tool to display special tools
saved in the database in TruTops Bend properly and make
collision calculations. A drawing of the side view is usually
sufficient.

23.1 Drawing a normal upper tool

Defining height and type of
tool

1. Select >Bend >Bending tool >Create.

The "Bending tool assistant" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the height of the tool.
3. Select "Upper tool" under "Type of tool".
A preview of the selected type of tool is displayed in the
preview window.
4. Select Continue.

Selecting a view

Note
Here, it is defined whether a side view or a front view of the
tool is to be drawn.
5. Select "Side view".
6. Select Continue.

Selecting tool type

Selecting a tool adapter

Entering tool tip parameters

7. Select the "Normal" tool type.

8. Select Continue.
9. Select "Head position".
10. Select Continue.
11. Enter "opening angle" and "radius".
12. Select Continue.
Note
With the arrow keys, angles can be entered in steps of 45.

Drawing the right side of the

tool
13.
14.
15.
16.

238

Enter the "length" of the line.

Enter the "angle".
Select "absolute" or "relative" angle for the marked point.
Select Preview.
The drawn line is shown in the window.

22BDrawing a bending tool

2007-04-20

S523EN

17. Use Continue to go to the end of the drawn line.

The line is drawn in black and the end is marked with a red X.
or
Use Back to delete the drawn line.
18. Select Auto. .
The right side of the tool is automatically drawn to the specified
height.
Completing the drawing of
the upper tool

Modifying a tool

19. Select Mirror.

The tool is drawn completely.
If the sides of the tool are different, the same procedure as for
the right side must be followed for the left.
20. Mark the corner or the line with Last or Next.
21. Select "Corners" and enter "Rounding" or "Bevel".
or
Select "Lines" and enter "Length" or "Angle".
22. Select Modify.
23. Select OK.
The upper tool is displayed.
24. Save the tool as '*.WZG'.

23.2 Drawing a normal lower tool

Defining height and type of
tool

1. Select >Bend >Bending tool >Create.

The "Bending tool assistant" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the height of the tool.
3. Select "Lower tool".
A preview of the selected type of tool is displayed in the
preview window.
4. Select Continue.

Selecting a view

Note
Here, it is defined whether a side view or a front view of the
tool is to be drawn.
5. Select "Side view".
6. Select Continue.

Selecting tool type

S523EN

2007-04-20

7. Select the "Normal" tool type.

8. Select Continue.

22BDrawing a bending tool

239

Entering die lower tool

parameters

9. Enter the "tool width", "opening angle", "die width", "groove

ground radius" and "feed radius".
10. Activate "Die width without feed radius" if the feed radius is not
to be taken into account for the die width.

Die width without feed radius

Die width with feed radius

Fig. 41731

11. Select Continue.

Note
With the arrow keys, angles can be entered in steps of 45.

Drawing the right side of the

tool
12.
13.
14.
15.

Enter the "length" of the line.

Enter the "angle".
Select "absolute" or "relative" angle for the marked point.
Select Preview.
The drawn line is shown in the window.
16. Use Continue to go to the end of the drawn line.
The line is drawn in black and the end is marked with a red X.
or
Use Back to delete the drawn line.
17. Select Auto. .
The right side of the tool is automatically drawn to the specified
height.
Drawing the left side of the
lower tool
Modifying a tool

240

18. Draw the left side as described above.

19. Mark the corner or the line with Last or Next.
20. Select "Corners" and enter "Rounding" or "Bevel".
or
Select "Lines" and enter the "Length" or "Angle".

22BDrawing a bending tool

2007-04-20

S523EN

21. Select Modify.

22. Select OK.
The lower tool is displayed.
23. Save the tool as '*.WZG'.

23.3 Drawing holder

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Enter the "height" and select "Upper tool" or "Lower tool".

Select Continue.
Select "Side view".
Select Continue.
Select "Holder".
A preview of the selected type of tool is displayed in the
preview window.
Select Continue.
For upper tools, select "Type of tool adapter".
Select Continue.
Draw the right side.
Draw the left side.
Modify the corners or lines.
Select OK.
The holder is displayed.
Save the tool as '*.WZG'.

23.4 Drawing a Z tool

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

S523EN

2007-04-20

Enter the "height" and select "Upper tool" or "Lower tool".

Select Continue.
Select "Side view".
Select Continue.
Select "Z tool".
A preview of the selected type of tool is displayed in the
preview window.
Select Continue.
For upper tools, select "Type of tool adapter".
Select Continue.
Enter the "angle" and the "flange length" of the Z tool.
Select Continue.
Draw the right side.

22BDrawing a bending tool

241

12. Draw the left side.

13. Modify the corners or lines.
14. Select OK.
The Z tool is displayed.
15. Save the tool as '*.WZG'.

23.5 Drawing an adapter

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Enter the "height" and select "Upper tool" or "Lower tool".

Select Continue.
Select "Side view".
Select Continue.
Select "Adapter".
A preview of the selected type of tool is displayed in the
preview window.
6. Select Continue.
7. Select OK.
The adapter is displayed in TruTops CAD.
8. Save the tool as '*.WZG'.

23.6 Drawing front view of a horn tool

Note
A front view of upper or lower tools is required only if they vary
from the standard front view. This applies, for example, to horn
tools.
1. Enter the "height" and select "Upper tool" or "Lower tool".
2. Select Continue.
3. Select "Front view".
The front view is displayed in the preview window.
4. Select Continue.
5. Enter the parameters of the tool.
6. Select Continue.
7. Draw the right side.
8. Draw the left side.
9. Modify the corners or lines.

242

22BDrawing a bending tool

2007-04-20

S523EN

10. Select OK.

The horn tool is displayed.
11. Save the tool as '*.WZG'.

23.7 Modifying tool

Condition
The drawing of a tool drawn with the assistant is open.
1. Select >Bend >Bending tool >Modify.
The "Bending tool assistant" mask is displayed.
2. Delete the corners or lines that are to be modified.
3. Redraw the corners or lines.
4. Select OK.
The modified tool is displayed.
5. Save tool.

S523EN

2007-04-20

22BDrawing a bending tool

243

244

22BDrawing a bending tool

2007-04-20

S523EN

Index
Auxiliary line, drawing

Tangent at the arc element and point .. 100

A
Applications in TruTops .................................18

Closing individually and reopening .........18

Closing, permanently ..............................19

Language, switching ...............................20

Opening, several times ...........................19

Renaming................................................19
Arcs

drawing..................................................120
Arcs, drawing

Arcs, concentric, drawing......................121

Arcs, converting into roundings.............123

Multicurve contour, drawing ..................122

Through center, radius, start and end

angle .....................................................122

Through center, start and end point......120

Through diameter..................................121

Through three points.............................120

Assistant for layout

Parts and saving as GEO, extracting......95

Parts, extracting and saving as sheet.....96

Auxiliary circle, drawing ...............................104

Center and diameter .............................105

Center and radius..................................104

Diameter................................................105

Tangential to an element ......................108

Tangential to an element and two

points.....................................................107

Tangential to three elements ................107

Tangential to two elements ...................106

Three points ..........................................104

Auxiliary circles, drawing

Auxiliary circles, concentric...................106

Auxiliary geometries

Deleting .................................................155
Auxiliary geometry

Deleting .................................................109

Tracing ..................................................133
Auxiliary line

Element, dividing...................................103
Auxiliary line, drawing

2 points....................................................99

Auxiliary line at right angles to an

element .................................................101

Auxiliary line parallel to the existing

one ..........................................................99

Horizontal or vertical .............................100

Point and angle of inclination ................101

Point and angle to the base line............102

Tangent at 2 arc elements ....................102

S523EN

2007-03-

B
Base elements for macros, defining

Circle, ellipse or dot mark point............ 136

Forming tool, drawing........................... 140

Rectangle or oblong hole ..................... 138

Tool drawing......................................... 142

Your own geometry templates ............. 139

Basic data, setting

See the software manuals of

TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch .......... 55
Bend relief through macro, creating any..... 147
Bending

Profile as auxiliary geometry, creating . 232

Bending lines

Allocating bending information ............. 229

Bending profile, creating....................... 231

Bending profile, unfolding..................... 230

Bending tools, adopting........................ 230

Creating ................................................ 228

Marking................................................. 229

Modify ................................................... 229

Bending tool ................................................ 238

Adapter, drawing .................................. 242

Holder, drawing .................................... 241

Horn tool, drawing a front view............. 242

Lower tool, drawing .............................. 239

Modifying tool ....................................... 243

Upper tool, drawing .............................. 238

Z tool, drawing...................................... 241

Bevels

Lines, converting into bevels ................ 184

Bumping (round bending), creating ............ 232
Button texts in the function browser,
displaying and hiding ............................... 27

C
Calculator...................................................... 49

Coordinates of points, entering .............. 50

Deactivating, permanently...................... 49

Numerical values, entering in input

fields ....................................................... 50
Characteristics .............................................. 38

Characteristic fixed, switching on or off.. 38

Characteristics, highlighting ................... 39

Index

245

Characteristics, removing .......................39

Deleting .................................................153
Notches - advanced options ...................40
TruTops behavior ....................................38
Circles

Modifying diameter................................172

Scaling diameter ...................................183

Circles, scaling diameter .............................183
Clearing

Geometries............................................173
Color scheme, modifying ...............................41
Color, modifying...........................................170

Color of individual elements, modifying 170

Color, modifying

Lines of one color, modifying

simultaneously ......................................171
Color, presetting ..........................................170
Combining

Elements ...............................................174
Command line and input line .........................26
Command prompt

PDM functions, executing .......................33

Contour running parallel to the contour
(equidistant), creating.............................132
Contours

Closing open ones ................................183

Merging .................................................184

Narrow contours, converting into lines..182

Smoothing .............................................180
Contours, deleting .......................................152
Coordinate system

Zero point, displacing............................111

Coordinates of points, entering......................50
Copy Paste, using ......................................48
Corner notches ............................................124
Corners

Recreate................................................131

Rounding...............................................131

D
Deleting........................................................152

Auxiliary geometries..............................155

Characteristics ......................................153

Dimensioning ........................................154

Duplicate single holes ...................147, 154

Elements with certain line properties ....152

Short elements ......................................153

Single elements or contours .................152

Small contours ......................................153

Dependencies between files(PDM)

Dependencies, checking.........................72
Detail view, displaying ...................................42
Diameter of circles, modifying .....................172

246

Index

Diameters of roundings or circles,

modifying ............................................... 172
Dimensioning .............................................. 215

Angle .................................................... 218

Circles, radii, arc lengths ...................... 217

Deleting ........................................ 154, 220

Format, setting ..................................... 220

Lines ..................................................... 215

Moving .................................................. 218

Showing and hiding .............................. 215

Standard text size, setting .................... 221

Dimensioning text, adapting ....................... 219
Directories

Renaming ............................................... 59
Display of drawings, restructuring................. 42
Drawing

Bevels................................................... 129

Circles................................................... 116

Corners, rounding................................. 131

Equidistant to the contour..................... 132

Notches ................................................ 124

Points.................................................... 112

Polygons............................................... 119

Rectangles ........................................... 119

Single holes, circles of holes and

rows of holes ........................................ 135
Drawing bevel

Through vertex ..................................... 130

With distance to the vertex ................... 129

Drawing data, entering.................................. 77
Drawing display

Detail view, displaying ............................ 42

Drawing, displaying completely .............. 42

Drawing, restructuring ............................ 42

Drawing, zooming................................... 43

Outline points, displaying and hiding...... 44

Screen section, moving .......................... 43

View, get last .......................................... 44

View, memorizing and recalling.............. 44

Drawing, displaying completely .................... 42
Drawing, zooming ......................................... 43
Drawings, display

Detail view, displaying ............................ 42

Drawing, displaying completely .............. 42

Drawing, restructuring ............................ 42

Drawing, zooming................................... 43

Outline points, displaying and hiding...... 44

Screen section, moving .......................... 43

View, get last .......................................... 44

View, memorizing and recalling.............. 44

Duplicate single holes

Deleting ........................................ 147, 154

2007-03-

S523EN

Punching or bending tools, saving as

WZG ....................................................... 80

Saving drawing as GEO ......................... 76

TruTops CAD files .................................. 75

Files, searching for........................................ 62
Files, sending from PDM to My Documents
in the file system ...................................... 65
Files, sending via email................................. 64
Files, zipping ................................................. 65
Font, creating your own .............................. 188
Foreign formats from CAD systems,
opening .................................................... 81

Assistant for layout ................................. 95

IGS loading options, defining ................. 87

Loading options DXF or DWG, defining . 83

MI loading options, defining.................... 90

Parts, extracting and saving as

GEO.................................................. 95, 96
Function browser .......................................... 25

Button texts in the function browser,

displaying and hiding.............................. 27

Displaying and hiding ............................. 27

Quick navigation bar, displaying and

hiding ...................................................... 27

Symbols, modifying the size................... 30

Element groups ...........................................156

Dissolving..............................................156

Forming .................................................156
Elements

Combining .............................................174

Separating.............................................173

Shortening or extending........................176
Elements

Smoothing .............................................180
Embossed text

Creating.................................................191

Rotating using wheel mouse.................191

Entries in the command line, repeating .........48
Equidistant to the contour, drawing .............132
Exporting (PDM)

Using prompt/script .................................71

Using the TruTops file browser ...............70

Extending

Elements ...............................................176

F
File dependencies, checking (PDM)..............72
File or directories, renaming ..........................59
File properties

Viewing....................................................66
Files (PDM), importing

Using file browser....................................68

Using Windows Explorer.........................67

Files and folders (PDM), importing/
exporting...................................................67
Files, adding other details to list field ............63
Files, automatically checking updated
status when loading and saving in
TruTops (PDM).........................................74
Files, deleting and restoring ..........................60
Files, importing/exporting using Windows
Explorer (PDM).........................................67
Files, opening

2D drawings in DXF, DWG, IGS or MI

format ......................................................82

Foreign formats from CAD systems........81

TruTops files ...........................................81

Workfile ...................................................81
Files, opening and saving..............................56
Files, opening with the Geo Viewer...............64
Files, saving

Drawing data, entering............................77

Drawings, saving as DXF........................78

Geometry templates, saving as VLG

for macros ...............................................79

S523EN

2007-03-

G
Geo Viewer

Files, opening with it............................... 64

Geometries

Comparing with one another ................ 212

Dimensioning........................................ 215

Loading and preparing ......................... 222

Machining, preparing............................ 222

Mirroring ............................................... 166

Geometries, clearing................................... 173
Geometries, modifying

Color and line type ............................... 170

Moving .................................................. 160

Radii and diameters of roundings or

circles ................................................... 172

Rotating ................................................ 162

Scale..................................................... 164

Stretching ............................................. 169

Geometries, modifying scale

Modifying at a center ............................ 164

Through two points............................... 165

Geometries, moving

Moving horizontally or vertically ........... 160

Moving through two points ................... 161

Geometries, preparing ................................ 222

Contour start, defining .......................... 225

Contours, preferring ............................. 226

Index

247

Preferred direction, selecting ................225

Preparation, recalculating .....................226
Start points for machining, modifying....224
Geometries, preparing

Saving ...................................................226
Geometries, rotating

Rotating by a center ..............................162

Rotating by two points...........................163

Geometries, stretching

Stretching horizontally or vertically .......169

Geometry comparator..................................212

Comparison colors, setting ...................213

Loading comparison drawing ................213

Loading reference drawing ...................213

Opening and closing .............................212

Geometry templates, saving as VLG for
macros......................................................79

H
Hatch

Hatch, deleting ......................................159

Hatch, modifying ...................................159

Hole grid through macro, creating ...............146

I
Importing, files(PDM)

Using the prompt/script ...........................71

Importing, several folders (PDM)...................69
Internet

TruTops, obtaining tips and tricks ...........17

K
Key functions of TruTops, using ....................47
Keyboard buffer of command line, using
(entries, repeating) ...................................48
Keyboard operation .......................................46

Copy Paste, using ................................48

Key functions of TruTops, using .............47

Keyboard buffer Command line, using

(entries, repeating) ..................................48

Numerical values and coordinates,

entering ...................................................46

Texts, entering in input fields ..................46

Windows keyboard commands and

shortcuts, using .......................................46

248

Index

L
Language, switching ..................................... 20
Limited period license, applying for .............. 52
Line attributes (color and line type),
modifying ............................................... 170
Line color of individual existing elements,
modifying ............................................... 170
Line color, presetting................................... 170
Line type

Lines of one line type, modifying

simultaneously...................................... 171
Line type of individual existing elements,
modifying ............................................... 170
Line type, modifying .................................... 170
Line type, presetting.................................... 170
Lines

Drawing ................................................ 113

Lines of one color, modifying
simultaneously ....................................... 171
Lines of one line type, modifying
simultaneously ....................................... 171
Lines, bending............................................. 228
Lines, converting into bevels ...................... 184
Lines, drawing

As a tangent at an arc element and

point...................................................... 114

Horizontal or vertical lines .................... 114

Lines at right angles to another

element................................................. 114

Parallel line to the existing line ............. 113

Through a tangent at two arc

elements ............................................... 115

Through two points............................... 113

With point, angle of inclination and

length.................................................... 115
Loading

2D drawings in DXF, DWG, IGS or MI

format ..................................................... 82

Foreign formats from CAD systems ....... 81

Loading options

DXF, DWG.............................................. 83

IGS ......................................................... 87

MI............................................................ 90

M
Macros

Bend relief, creating any....................... 147

Circle, ellipse or dot mark point as

base element, defining ......................... 136

Forming tool as base element,

defining drawing ................................... 140

2007-03-

S523EN

Geometry templates as base element,

defining your own ..................................139

Hole grid, creating .................................146

Rectangle or oblong hole as base

element, defining...................................138

Row of holes, creating ..........................145

Single hole, creating......................143, 144

Single holes, circles of holes and

rows of holes, creating ..........................135

Tool drawing as base element,

defining..................................................142
Main menus and submenus ..........................24
Marking ........................................................157

Deleting .................................................157

Setting ...................................................157

Texts .....................................................186
Masks and messages, moving ......................41
Measuring

Angle .....................................................110

Coordinates of a point...........................110

Coordinates, radius and diameter of

a circle...................................................110

Distance between 2 points....................110

Horizontal or vertical distance

between 2 points ...................................110

Length ...................................................111
Merging

Contours................................................184
Mirroring

Mirroring on a horizontal or vertical

mirror line ..............................................166

Mirroring on a symmetry point ..............167

Mirroring geometries

Mirroring on a horizontal or vertical

mirror line ..............................................166
Mirroring geometries

Mirroring on a symmetry point ..............167

Mouse operation

Mouse pointer in masks, placing

automatically at OK .................................45
Moving

Moving horizontally or vertically ............160

Moving through two points ....................161

Multicurve contour, drawing.........................122
Multi-function buttons ....................................26

N
Narrow contours, converting into lines ........182
Notches

Advanced options through the ................40

Notches, drawing.........................................124

Acute angle element notches................128

Corner notch with same distances........126

S523EN

2007-03-

Corner notch with various distances .... 125

Creating bend relief later ...................... 128
X/Y element notches ............................ 127
Numerical values and coordinates, entering 46
Numerical values, entering in input fields ..... 50

O
Online help, calling up .................................. 17
Open contours, closing ............................... 183
Outer contours, machining.......................... 149
Outline points, displaying and hiding ............ 44

P
Parts, extracting

Saving as GEO....................................... 95

Saving as sheet...................................... 96
PDM (Product Data Management) ............... 31

Advantages ............................................ 31

Dependencies between files, checking .. 72

Files and folders, importing/exporting .... 67

Files, automatically checking updated

status when loading and saving in
TruTops TruTops.................................... 74

TruTops file browser............................... 56

TruTops with PDM, TruTops without

PDM, in comparison ............................... 32
PDM functions, calling up via command
prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe) ................... 33
pdmCLI.exe

PDM functions, executing....................... 33

Place holders (for search)............................. 51
Place holders (wildcards), searching with
the help of ................................................ 51
Points, drawing ........................................... 112
Polygons, drawing....................................... 119
Prepared geometries, machining sequence

Contours specifically before or after

others, machining ................................. 224
Printing.......................................................... 53

Files, textual content .............................. 53

Geos as HPGL ....................................... 54

Screen content ....................................... 53

Profile as auxiliary geometry, creating........ 232
Profiles

Bumping, creating ................................ 235

Creating ................................................ 234

Folding, creating................................... 236

Line through XY, creating..................... 234

Material, showing ................................. 233

Index

249

Punching or bending tools, saving as WZG ..80

Q
Quick navigation bar, displaying and hiding ..27

R
Radii of roundings or circles, modifying.......172
Readme, displaying .......................................17
Rectangles or oblong holes, converting
into lines .................................................182
Recycle bin (PDM).........................................60

Emptying .................................................60

Renaming................................................61
Rotating

Rotating by a center ..............................162

Rotating by two points...........................163

Round bending (bumping), creating ............232
Rounding radius, modifying .........................172
Roundings

Arcs, converting into roundings.............123

Row of holes through macro, creating.........145

S
Saving files

Workfile ...................................................75
Screen display

Color scheme, modifying ........................41

Masks and messages, moving................41

Window size, adapting ............................41

Screen section, moving .................................43
Scripts, executing (pdmCLI.exe) ...................33
Separating

Elements ...............................................173
Sequence of prepared geometries,
processing

Contour, setting a particular one at

the beginning.........................................223

Modifying arbitrarily ...............................223

Particular contour at the end, setting ....223

Shading........................................................157

Closed contours ....................................158

Short elements, deleting..............................153
Shortening

Elements ...............................................176
Simple drawing (module in TruTops CAD)....21

250

Index

Simple programming (module in

TruTops Punch) ....................................... 21
Single elements, deleting............................ 152
Single folders (PDM), importing

Using file browser................................... 68

Single hole through macro, creating ........... 144
Single hole with macro, creating................. 143
Single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros), creating ........................ 135
Small contours, deleting ............................. 153
Smoothing

Elements or contours ........................... 180

Software manual, displaying......................... 17
Software version, displaying ......................... 17
Status bar and message line ........................ 26
Stretching.................................................... 169

Stretching horizontally or vertically....... 169

Stretching with 2 points ........................ 169

Stretching geometries

Stretching with 2 points ........................ 169

Stretching horizontally or vertically ............. 169

T
Text parameters

Defining ................................................ 185

Modifying .............................................. 187

Texts

Entering ................................................ 185

Font file, creating.................................. 189

Font, creating your own........................ 188

Marking................................................. 186

Modifying parameters........................... 187

Pasting or modifying in geometries ...... 185

Reference file, creating ........................ 188

Reference point position....................... 185

Rotating using wheel mouse ................ 186

Standard texts ...................................... 186

Texts, entering in input fields ........................ 46
Toolbars ........................................................ 26

Deleting .................................................. 30

Displaying and hiding ............................. 28

Modifying existing, creating own ............ 29

Moving or downsizing............................. 28

Renaming ............................................... 29

Resetting to the original status............... 30

Symbols, modifying the size................... 30

TruTops CAD files, opening.......................... 81
TruTops file browser ..................................... 56

File or folders, renaming......................... 59

Files, adding other details to list field ..... 63

Files, deleting and restoring ................... 60

Files, opening with the Geo Viewer........ 64

Files, searching for ................................. 62

2007-03-

S523EN

Files, sending from PDM to My Documents

in the file system .....................................65

Files, sending via email...........................64

Files, zipping ...........................................65

Folders, creating new..............................58

Folders, deleting......................................58

Opening...................................................57

Recylce bin (PDM) ..................................60

TruTops license .............................................52
TruTops, exiting.............................................16
TruTops, operating using keyboard...............46
TruTops, operating with the mouse

Mouse pointer in masks, placing

automatically at OK .................................45
TruTops, starting ...........................................16
TruTops, tips and tricks from the Internet......17

U
User interface

Button texts in the function browser,

displaying and hiding ..............................27

Command line and input line ..................26

Function browser.....................................25

Function browser, displaying and hiding.27

Main menus and submenus....................24

Menus function browser and toolbars .....24

Multi-function buttons..............................26

Quick navigation bar, displaying and

hiding.......................................................27

Status bar and message line ..................26

Symbols (toolbars, function browsers),

modifying the size ...................................30

Toolbar, renaming ...................................29

Toolbars ..................................................26

Toolbars, deleting....................................30

Toolbars, displaying and hiding ..............28

Toolbars, modifying existing, creating

own..........................................................29

Toolbars, moving or downsizing .............28

Toolbars, resetting to original status .......30

User-defined settings

Copying and transferring.........................22

Reference element, removing .............. 204

Reference element, setting .................. 204
Reference element, showing................ 205
Variants

Allocating .............................................. 198

Conditions............................................. 195

Copying ................................................ 206

Creating ................................................ 195

Creating new variants........................... 206

Deleting ................................................ 207

Element selection, adopting ................. 198

Example................................................ 199

Executing.............................................. 197

Executing several times ....................... 207

Exporting as *.GEO .............................. 208

Exporting to Excel ................................ 209

Importing from Excel ............................ 211

Importing variables ............................... 203

Key words............................................. 193

Modifying .............................................. 206

Overview, selecting .............................. 197

Positioning ............................................ 206

Saving as *.GMV .................................. 208

Starting/Ending..................................... 194

Undoing ................................................ 197

Variables, creating and processing ...... 201

Variables, deleting................................ 203

Variables, exporting.............................. 203

Version, displaying........................................ 17
View, get last................................................. 44
View, memorizing and recalling .................... 44

W
Wildcards (for search)................................... 51
Window size, adapting.................................. 41
Windows keyboard commands and
shortcuts, using........................................ 46
Workfile

Opening .................................................. 81

Saving..................................................... 75

Z
Zero point of the coordinate system,
dispacing................................................ 111

V
Variables

Creating and processing .......................201

Deleting .................................................203

Exporting ...............................................203

Importing ...............................................203

S523EN

2007-03-

Index

251

252

Index

2007-03-

S523EN

Software manual

TruTops
Simple drawing and programming

Software manual

TruTops
Simple drawing and programming

Edition: 10/2006

Ordering information

Please state title of document, desired language and date of

edition.
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG
Technische Dokumentation
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
D-71254 Ditzingen, Germany
Phone: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-0
Fax: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-540
Internet: http://www.trumpf.com
E-mail: [email protected]

This document was compiled by the Technical documentation department of

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG.
All rights, especially the right to reproduce, distribute or translate this documentation, are reserved to TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG,
even in the case of patent and industrial rights applications. No part of this
documentation may be reproduced, processed, duplicated or distributed by
means of electronic systems in any form whatsoever without the prior written
consent of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG. Subject to technical alterations. Errors excepted.
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG assumes no liability for any
mistakes in this documentation. No liability is accepted for direct or indirect
damage or injury resulting from the delivery or use of this documentation to the
extent permitted by law.

Before you continue reading...

The aim of this software manual is to introduce, after a short
overview, the scope of functions of the "Simple drawing" and
"Simple programming" modules using two examples.
This software manual complements the software manuals in the
TruTops product family.

S580EN.DOC

Before you continue reading...

Table of contents
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8

2.
2.1

2.2

3.
3.1

Table of contents

Basics .................................................................................9
Opening simple modules ...................................................10
Subdivision of the user interface .......................................11
Zooming in the graphics window ..................................12
Operating simple modules using the keyboard .................12
Configuration .....................................................................13
Optimizing keyboard operation.....................................13
Entering values using the formula calculator.....................13
Setting and operating the 3D-Viewer.................................14
Meaning of colors and symbols .........................................15
What is important for bending parts...................................17
Base plus flanges .........................................................17
Bend factors and relief grooves....................................18
Data for bending ...........................................................19
Creating individual bend factors and relief
grooves .........................................................................19
Simple drawing ................................................................20
Example: drawing a flat workpiece ....................................20
Creating new drawing...................................................20
Drawing rectangular notch............................................21
Drawing square bevels .................................................22
Drawing roundings........................................................23
Drawing a circle ............................................................24
Drawing oblong hole.....................................................25
Drawing rectangular bevels ..........................................26
Closing and saving drawings........................................27
Example: drawing a bending part ......................................28
Creating new drawing...................................................28
Drawing flanges ............................................................29
Drawing notches at elements .......................................35
Drawing rectangular bevels ..........................................37
Displacing coordinates system .....................................39
Drawing a circle of holes ..............................................40
Managing bend factors and relief grooves ...................41
Drawing relief grooves - saving bending part ...............42
Simple programming.......................................................44
Example: programming L plate..........................................44
Creating new sheet.......................................................44
Load part.......................................................................44
Laying out the sheet .....................................................45
Defining slitting strategy ...............................................46
Processing parts automatically.....................................47

S580EN.DOC

3.2

S580EN.DOC

Optimizing the processing sequence ...........................49

Simulating processing ..................................................50
Example: programming bending part ................................51
Creating new sheet.......................................................51
Loading part..................................................................51
Laying out the sheet .....................................................52
Defining slitting strategy ...............................................52
Processing parts automatically.....................................53
Trimming sheets ...........................................................54
Optimizing the processing sequence ...........................54
Simulating processing ..................................................55

4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6

Generating an NC Program.............................................56
Defining settings ................................................................56
Defining parameters ..........................................................58
Defining options for subroutine technique .........................60
Defining vaporizing with the laser......................................60
Defining options for outputting the setup plan ...................61
Sending the NC program to the machine ..........................61

5.

Glossary............................................................................63

Table of contents

Table of contents

S580EN.DOC

1.

Basics

The vast majority of all workpieces are single parts. The "Simple
drawing" and "Simple programming" modules in the TruTops
production system offer exactly the scope of functions that are
needed for single workpieces.
From drawing the workpiece to the reliable NC program - the userguided, graphical user interface guides you safely and quickly
through the program. The design of the operating environment
enables operation per touch or completely via the keyboard.
Simple drawing
Elements

Corners

Inner contours

Flanges

Simple programming
Layout, changing
numbers of parts
Editing

Repositioning

Optimizing

NC program,
generating
Table 1

S580EN.DOC

Basics

Note
The simple modules are integrated in TruTops basic, for programming directly at the machine, and integrated in the TruTops full
version. In addition, TruTops basic is also available as a PC version.
TruTops basic does not have any nesting modules.

1.1

Opening simple modules

There are two variants for opening and closing the "Simple drawing
and programming" modules:
Opening via TruTops basic directly at the machine.
Opening via TruTops full version at the PC workstation.
Note
In TruTops basic and in the TruTops full version, an extensive
software documentation is available above the question mark in
the form of online help.

Opening TruTops basic

1. Open TruTops basic at the machine.

The initial screen is displayed.
2. Press on Drawing or Technology.
"Simple drawing" or "Simple programming" is immediately
opened.

Opening TruTops full version

1. Open the TruTops full version at the PC workstation.

The initial screen is displayed.
2. Press on Drawing or Technology.
The "Drawing" or "Technology" module is opened.
3. Select File> Simple drawing or >Simple programming.
"Simple drawing" or "Simple programming" is opened.

10

Basics

S580EN.DOC

1.2

Subdivision of the user interface

Guidance

Main actions

Coordinates

Graphics window

Prompt

Navigation (continue, undo...)

Information or entry

Subdivision of the user interface

S580EN.DOC

Fig. 47752EN

Basics

11

Zooming in the graphics window

The mouse pointer becomes a crosshair cursor when it is above
the graphics window. A random, framed in cut out can be enlarged
by using the left mouse button. The overall view is displayed again
via the right mouse button.

1. Left click on the desired area.

2. Pull up a frame using the mouse.
3. Click once again with the left mouse button.
The framed cut out is displayed in enlarged form.
4. Right click using the right mouse button.
The overall view is displayed.

1.3

Operating simple modules using the

keyboard

The "Simple drawing and programming" modules can be operated

using the mouse, per touch screen, and via the keyboard.
There is a subheading in square brackets beneath every touch
button. The subheading matches the designation of a key in the
number block on the keyboard.

Single
hole

Row of
holes/
Hole grid

Circle of
holes

Select hole
geometry

Coordinates
system

Other
flange

Delete/
Restore

Undo

Inner
contours
finished

[4]

[5]

[6]

[Picture up]

[Pos 1]

[Picture
down]

[2]

[Esc]

[End]
Table 2

12

Basics

S580EN.DOC

1.4

Configuration

Optimizing keyboard operation

To enable you to operate the "Simple drawing and programming"
modules optimally using the keyboard, TruTops key functions must
be set.

Select Data module >User >Configuration, "Set TruTops key

functions".

1.5

Entering values using the formula

calculator

Using the formula calculator, you can:

Carry out basic calculator operations (point before dash).
Transfer results into the entry fields.

Opening formula calculator

1. Either

Double click on the entry field using the mouse.

or

Executing basic calculator

operations

Press the <+> key in the entry field.

2. Enter for example (10+20)*5-(40/2)+10.

Note
A special feature of the formula calculator is that the formula
stays displayed in the entry field and can be modified.
3. Press Calculate.
The result 140 is displayed.
4. Press Accept.
The result will be adopted in the entry field.

S580EN.DOC

Basics

13

1.6

Setting and operating the 3D-Viewer

The 3D-Viewer shows three-dimensional models of the drawn geometries.

Setting the 3D-Viewer

If the 3D model of the geometry is not displayed: select View

>Filled in the menu line for the 3D-Viewer.

Rotating 3D model,
changing size

1. To rotate the 3D model: keep the left mouse button pressed

down.
A double arrow is displayed.
2. Move the mouse with the left mouse button pressed down.
The 3D model moves in the corresponding direction.
3. To enlarge or make the 3D model smaller: keep the right
mouse button pressed down.
A double arrow is displayed.
4. Move the mouse upwards with the right mouse button pressed
down.
The 3D model is made smaller.
5. Move the mouse downwards with the right mouse button
pressed down.
The 3D model is enlarged.

14

Basics

S580EN.DOC

1.7

Meaning of colors and symbols

In the standard settings, colors and symbols in the Technology

module and in the "Simple drawing and programming" modules
have the following meaning:
Color

Symbol, line type

Meaning

Cyan

Asterisk

Point for dot point marking

Yellow

Line type: solid

Marking and/or engraving (adjustable)

Yellow

Line type: dotted

Vaporizing (adjustable)

Red

All line types

Geometry that is not to be processed

Red

Frame

Only "Simple drawing and programming":

The subsequent action is related to the object framed in red

Red

Line

Only "Simple drawing and programming":

Automatic suggestion that can be confirmed or rejected

White or
black

Line type: solid

White or
black

Line type: solid

Geometry that is to be processed normally (approach and cut)

White or
black

Line type: dashed

Geometry that is to be cut without being approached

Blue

Line type: solid

Blue

Line type: dashed

Travel limits of the machine; non-active station

Blue

Arrow

Repositioning of non-active clamping

Blue

Square

Ejection via chute

Cyan

Cross

Tool center for punching

Cyan

Line type: solid

Punching operation

Cyan

Square

Ejection via chute

Yellow

Line type: solid

Yellow

Coordinates X,Y

Zero point of the machine

Yellow

Circle

Collision point for processing definition

Yellow

Cross

Yellow

Rectangle, solid line type

When standard tool is active:

Clamping dead range for the standard tool

Geometries

Sheet, geometry
Circumscribing rectangle with symbolic parts display

Operations
Traversing paths between processed parts
Machining operations in non-active clamping range

Non-machined geometries/contours
Current processing in the simulation

Positions on the transverse rail for tools and clamps

Tool center when processing with presser foot

When MultiTool is active:

Maximum clamping dead range for the MultiTool type affected

S580EN.DOC

Basics

15

Color

Symbol, line type

Meaning

Yellow

Rectangle, dashed line type

When standard tool is active:

Maximum clamping dead range for MultiTools.
When MultiTool is active:
Clamping dead range for standard tools

Yellow

Trapezoid

Clamping surface for clamps

Yellow

Circle in dashes

Repositioning device

Yellow

Triangle (arrow)

In connection with positioning motion:

Direction of the positioning motion
Start point of the next processing

Yellow

Square

Ejection via chute

Green

Line type: solid

Laser processing
All other machining operations of a compulsory sequence

Green

Line type: dashed

Approach flag for laser processing

First processing in a compulsory sequence
Traversing paths between the parts of a processing sequence

Green

Square

Ejection via punching flap

Green

Cross

Tool center when processing with delayed single stroke

Magenta

Line type: solid

Selected objects

Magenta

Line type: dashed

Working range of the machine

Magenta

Square

Ejection via laser flap

Red

Line type: solid

Geometry and processing of the first part in the positioning sequence with
interactive optimization

Red

Line type: dashed

Travel limits of the machine, active station

Red

Asterisk

Punching head position during loading

Red

Square

Red

Square with diagonal

Ejection with push-out subroutine

Red

Triangle

Manual removal after machine stop

Red

Circle/Rectangle

Stop pin without/with sensor

Red

Arrow

Repositioning of active clamping

Red

Frame

Only "Simple drawing and programming":

The subsequent action is related to the object framed in red

Red

Line

Only "Simple drawing and programming":

Automatic suggestion that can be confirmed or rejected

Ejection with chute during punching

Initial processing with interactive optimization

Colors and symbols

16

Basics

S580EN.DOC

1.8

What is important for bending parts

Base plus flanges

A bending part comprises of a base and a random amount of
flanges. The base is the surface in the drawing from where the
most important or most bends start out.
If the base is determined in the construction drawing of a bending
part, then several flanges are added to this.

Base

Flanges

Configuration of bending parts

S580EN.DOC

Fig. 46376

Basics

17

Bend factors and relief grooves

What do bend factors
produce?

During bending, the material is stretched or flattened. The change

in the workpiece length during the bending process is compensated with the use of so-called bend factors.
In "Simple drawing" the drawing is made with the original dimensions from the two dimensional construction drawing.
To enable the finished bent workpiece to correspond with the required dimensions, the dimensions of the flat blank are automatically shortened or extended by the bend factors.

Why are relief grooves

necessary?

A relief groove is a "small notch". It reduces deformation of the

edge or corner during bending.

Example of a corner relief groove

18

Basics

Fig. 46548

S580EN.DOC

Data for bending

The database

In accordance with the material ID and with the sheet thickness,

the "Simple drawing" module selects the upper and lower tool
combination from a database, and displays the bend factor
associated with it.

Where do the data for

bending come from?

1st way:
An individual database has been created. Creating the bending
data requires expert knowledge. The data from the individual
database are always queried first.
2nd way:
There is a connection to TruTops Bend. "Simple drawing"
reads off the data from this database.
3rd way:
"Simple drawing" calculates the bend factors in accordance
with DIN if the individual database is empty or a connection to
TruTops Bend does not exist.

Creating individual bend factors and relief

grooves
1. Press Manage.
2. Press Manage bend factors or Manage relief grooves.
3. Press New.
4. Enter data for bend factors or relief grooves.
5. Press Enter.
The new data are entered into the selection field and into the individual database.

S580EN.DOC

Basics

19

2.

Simple drawing

2.1

Example: drawing a flat workpiece

Flat workpiece: "L-plate"

Fig. 46531

Creating new drawing

1. Press New drawing.
2. Enter or select material:

"Designation": St37-20.

"Thickness" 2 mm.
3. Press Continue.
4. Enter "Base measurements":

"Horizontally": 120 mm.

"Vertically": 120 mm.

5. Press Continue.

20

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing rectangular notch

1. Press Corners.
2. Press Rectangular notch.
3. Enter notch values:

"Horizontally": 70 mm.

"Vertically": 60 mm.

"Relief groove": 0 mm.

4. Press Continue.
A suggestion is displayed in red.
5. If the notch is not positioned at the correct place: press No
repeatedly.
6. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes.
The notch is drawn.

Fig. 46471

7. Press Finished.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

21

Drawing square bevels

1. Press Square Bevel.
2. Enter bevel values:

"Distance": 10 mm.
3. Press Continue.
A suggestion is displayed in red.
4. If the bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press No
repeatedly.
5. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes.
The bevel is drawn.

Fig. 46472

6. Press Finished.

22

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing roundings
1. Press Rounding.
2. Enter rounding data:

"Radius": 10 mm.
3. Press Continue.
A suggestion is displayed in red.
4. If the first rounding is not positioned at the correct place: press
No repeatedly.
5. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes.
6. To position the second rounding at the correct place: press No
repeatedly.
7. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes.
The roundings are drawn.

Fig. 46473

8. Press Finished.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

23

Drawing a circle
1. Press Inner contours.
2. Either

If an inner contour has not yet been drawn:

Press Single hole, Circle.

or

If an inner contour has already been drawn:

Press Single hole, Select hole geometry, Circle.

3. Enter circle data:

"Diameter": 10 mm.
4. Press Continue.
5. Enter the single hole position:

"to the right": 10 mm.

"to the top": 110 mm.

6. Press Finished.
7. Press Single hole, Select hole geometry, Circle.
8. Enter Circle data:

"Diameter": 10 mm.
9. Press Continue.
10. Enter the single hole position:

"to the right": 10 mm.

"to the top": 10 mm.

The single holes are drawn.

Fig. 46474

11. Press Finished.

24

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing oblong hole

1. Press Elements.
2. Press Oblong hole.
3. Enter oblong hole data:

"Depth": 20 mm.

"Width": 10 mm.
4. Press Continue.
A suggestion is displayed in red.
5. If the edge on which the oblong hole is to be positioned is not
correct: press Next or Previous repeatedly.
6. If the correct position has been reached: press Continue.
Changing reference to edge

7. Press Change reference.

8. Press Right edge end.
9. Enter position of notch center:

"Distance": 15 mm.
10. Press Continue.
The oblong hole is drawn.

Fig. 46475

11. Press Element finished.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

25

Drawing rectangular bevels

1. Press Corners.
2. Press Rectangle Bevel.
3. Enter bevel values:

"Horizontally": 5 mm.

"Vertically": 10 mm.
4. Press Continue.
A suggestion is displayed in red.
5. If the first bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press No
repeatedly.
6. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes.
7. If the second bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press
No repeatedly.
8. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes.
The bevels are drawn.

Fig. 46476

9. Press Finished.

26

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Closing and saving drawings

1. Press Corners finished.
2. Press All finished.
3. Save part: press Yes.
"File information" is opened.
4. Enter file information.
5. Select OK.
"Save file" is opened.
6. Enter L-plate next to "File name".
7. Select OK.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

27

Example: drawing a bending part

210

435

20

10

39.99 72.51

75

2.2

495

35 40

40

Bending part: "Box"

Fig. 46547

Creating new drawing

1. Press New drawing.
2. Enter or select material:

"Designation": St37-20.

"Thickness": 2 mm.
3. Press Continue.
Note
The base is the surface in the drawing from where the most
important or most bends start out.
4. Enter "Base measurements":

"Horizontally": 495 mm.

"Vertically": 435 mm.

5. Press Continue.

28

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing flanges
1. Press Flanges.
2. Press Generate.
The lower edge is marked in red.
3. If the correct edge upon which the flange is to be drawn is not
selected:

Press Previous or Next.

4. Press Continue.
Drawing lower flange

5. Enter flange values:

"Height": 75 mm.
6. Enter the distances:

"from the left": 0 mm.

"from the right": 0 mm.

7. Press Continue.
8. Specify flange direction:

Press To the top.

The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green.
9. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46477

10. Press Generate.

11. To select the upper edge:

Press Previous or Next.

12. Press Continue.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

29

Drawing upper flange

13. Enter flange values:

"Height": 75 mm.
14. Enter the distances:

"from the left": 0 mm.

"from the right": 0 mm.

15. Press Continue.
16. Specify flange direction:

Press To the top.

The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green.
17. Press Generate.
18. To select the left edge:

Press Previous or Next.

19. Press Continue.

Drawing left flange

20. Enter flange values:

"Height": 75 mm.
21. Enter the distances:

"from the left": 0 mm.

"from the right": 0 mm.

22. Press Continue.
23. Specify flange direction:

Press To the top.

The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green.

30

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Defining flange overlapping

24. To define flange overlapping: press Left.

Notes
The touch buttons for the overlapping are not pressed in.
The overlapping of the flanges is represented with shaded bar
displays. The overlapping can be controlled via the positioning
of the bars to one another.

Overlapping of flanges

Fig. 46532

25. Press Continue.

The "*" symbol is displayed at the next corner.
26. To define flange overlapping: press Left.
27. Press Continue.
28. Press Generate.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

31

Drawing first right flange

29. To select the right edge:

Press Previous or Next.

30. Press Continue.
31. Enter flange values:

"Height": 35 mm.
32. Enter the distances:

"from the left": 0 mm.

"from the right": 0 mm.

33. Press Continue.
34. Specify flange direction:

Press To the top.

The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green.
35. To define flange overlapping: press Bottom.
36. Press Continue.
The "*" symbol is displayed at the next corner.
37. To define flange overlapping: press Top.
38. Press Continue.
39. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46478

32

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing second right flange

40. Press Generate.

41. To select the right edge:

Press Previous or Next.

42. Press Continue.
43. Enter flange values:

"Height": 40 mm.
44. Enter the distances:

"from the left": 0 mm.

"from the right": 0 mm.

45. Press Continue.
46. Specify flange direction:

Press to the bottom.

The flange is drawn.
47. To define flange overlapping: press None.
48. Press Continue.

Drawing third right flange

49. Press Generate.

50. To select the right edge:

Press Previous or Next.

51. Press Continue.
52. Enter flange values:

"Height": 40 mm.
53. Enter the distances:

"from the left": 0 mm.

"from the right": 0 mm.

54. Press Continue.
55. Specify flange direction:

Press To the top.

The flange is drawn.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

33

56. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46479

57. Press Flanges finished.

34

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing notches at elements

1. Press Elements.
2. If the correct lower flange is not selected:

Press Other flange.

Navigate to the lower flange using the navigation touch

button.

Press Continue.
3. Press Rectangle.
Drawing rectangular notch
at lower flange

4. Enter rectangular values:

"Depth": 40 mm.

"Width": 210 mm.

Note
The entered values are self-sustaining. They don't have to be
reentered for more notches.
5. Press Continue, Continue.

Changing reference
for the notch

6. Press Change reference.

Press Central.

Press Continue.
The "*" symbol marks the notch center at the element.
7. Press Continue.
The notch is drawn.

Drawing rectangular notch

at upper flange

8. To select the upper flange:

Press Other flange.

Navigate to the upper flange using the navigation touch

button.

Press Continue.
9. Press Rectangle.
10. Press Continue, Continue, Continue.
The notch is drawn.

Drawing rectangular notch

at left flange

11. To select the left flange:

Press Other flange.

Navigate to the left flange using the navigation touch

button.

Press Continue.
12. Press Rectangle.
13. Press Continue, Continue, Continue.
The notch is drawn.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

35

14. Press Element finished.

15. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46480

36

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Drawing rectangular bevels

1. To select the left flange:

Press Other flange.

Navigate to the left flange using the navigation touch

button.
2. Press Corners.
Drawing bevels for the upper,
lower, and left flange

3. Press Square Bevel.

4. Enter bevel values:

"Distance": 39.99 mm.

5. Press Continue.
A red cross marks the corner for the next action.
6. If the first bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press No
repeatedly.

Corners to be processed (red cross)

Fig. 46533

Note
Make sure that the red cross is positioned at the correct
corner.
7. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes.
8. If the second bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press
No repeatedly.
9. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes.
The bevels are drawn.
10. Press Finished.

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

37

11. Repeat steps for the upper and lower flange.

Drawing bevels for the right
flange

12. To select the right flange:

Press Other flange.

Navigate to the right flange using the navigation touch

button.
13. Press Corners.
14. Press Square Bevel.
15. Enter bevel values:

"Distance": 10 mm.
16. Press Continue.
17. If the first bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press No
repeatedly.
18. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes.
19. If the second bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press
No repeatedly.
20. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes.
The bevels are drawn.
21. Press Finished.
22. To display the 3D model of the bending part:

Press Corners finished.

Press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46534

23. Press Inner contours finished.

38

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

Displacing coordinates system

1. Press Inner contours.
2. Press Other flange.
3. Press Base.
4. Press Continue.
5. Press Coordinates system.
6. Press Bottom left.

Fig. 46535

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

39

Drawing a circle of holes

1. Press Inner contours.
2. Either

If an inner contour has not yet been drawn:

Press Circle of holes, Circle.

or

If an inner contour has already been drawn:

Press Circle of holes, Select hole geometry, Circle.

4. Enter circle data:

"Diameter": 20 mm.
5. Press Continue.
6. Enter center of hole circle:

"to the right": 247 mm.

"to the top": 217.5 mm.

7. Press Continue.
The center is marked with a red cross.
8. Press the lower symbol under "Point/Angle definition".
9. Enter hole circle dimensions:

"Start angle": 0.

"End angle": 360.

"Radius": 100 mm.

"Number": 8.
10. Press Circle of holes finished.
The circle of holes is drawn.
11. Press Inner contours finished.

40

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

12. To display the 3D model of the bending part:

Press 3D-Viewer.

Fig. 46536

13. Press All finished.

Managing bend factors and relief grooves

(see Section 1.8, p. 19)

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

41

Drawing relief grooves - saving bending part

1. Press the lower symbol under "Corner relief groove", and
upper symbol under "Edge relief groove".
2. Enter corner relief groove:

"Diameter": 4 mm.
3. Enter edge relief groove:

"Length": 5 mm.

"Width": 2 mm.
4. Press Continue.
Note
For the selected material ID and thickness, the entered values
for the corner and edge relief grooves can be entered into the
database.
5. Transfer values to database? Press Yes.
Note
The relief grooves are saved after saving the drawing.
6. Save part: press Yes.
"File information" is opened.
7. Enter file information.
8. Select OK.
"Save file" is opened.
9. Enter Box next to "File name".
10. Select OK.

42

Simple drawing

S580EN.DOC

The file is saved. The relief grooves are displayed. The bending
part has been shrunk in accordance with the bend factor.

Fig. 46537

S580EN.DOC

Simple drawing

43

3.

Simple programming

3.1

Example: programming L plate

Creating new sheet

1. Press New sheet.
2. Enter machine and sheet data:

"Machine": TruPunch 1000.

"Material ID": ST37-20.

"XxYxZ": 2000x1000x2 mm.

3. Enter margins:

"Left": 20 mm.

"Right": 20 mm.

"Top": 20 mm.
4. To set the lower margin: press on the lower icon under "Block
clamping range".

Enter 100 mm.

5. Press Continue.
The empty sheet is displayed.

Load part
1. Press Load part.
2. Select file 'L-Platte.geo'.
3. Select OK.
The part is displayed under "Part information".
4. Enter part information:

"Number of pieces": 30.

"Angle": 0.
5. Enter web width for parts:

"X": 15 mm.

"Y": 15 mm.

44

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

Laying out the sheet

1. To change the start corner: press Start corner.
2. Press Top left.
3. Press Continue.
The sheet layout is displayed:

Fig. 46538

Changing block layout

4. Press Format block.

5. Press +X repeatedly.
The modified sheet layout is displayed:

Fig. 46539

6. Press Continue.

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

45

Adding parts

7. Press Change numbers of parts.

Press +X repeatedly.

Press +Y repeatedly.
The modified sheet layout is displayed:

Fig. 46540

8. Press Continue, Continue.

The final sheet layout is displayed.
9. Press Continue to technology.
"Separating strategy" is opened.

Defining slitting strategy

Press Grid.
"Automatic processing" is displayed.

46

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

Processing parts automatically

1. To create your own tooling list: press Tooling lists.
"Tooling list management" is opened.
2. Select New.
"Create new tooling list" is opened.
3. Enter name: e.g. User1.
4. In the tooling list: select Circular 10 mm.
5. Select Undo.
6. Define the tooling lists for automatic processing:

Select "Single hole": User1.

Select "Notch": Trumpf.

Select "Contour": Trumpf.

7. Press Edit.
Automatic processing begins. The tools used are displayed in
the information area on the right-hand side. Processings are
marked in red.
Note
Tooling lists can still be changed at the present time for processings shown in red. Undo cancels the complete processing.
All processings are shown in cyan after the next step. The
named actions are then no longer an option.

Fig. 46543

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

47

8. To check whether the processing is complete: make a frame

around a part using the left mouse button.
The part is shown in enlarged form.
Processing oblong hole
manually

9. If the oblong hole is not processed: press Process one part.

Press Elements, At element.

The element not processed is framed in red (in this example:
straight element at oblong hole).

Press Tool.

In the selection list: select Rectangle 10x5 mm.

Select OK.

Press "Confirm processing for this element": press Yes.

The next element not processed is framed in red (in this
example: circular element at oblong hole).

Press Tool.

In the selection list: select Circular 10 mm.

Select OK.

Press "Confirm processing for this element": press Yes.

The next element not processed is framed in red (in this
example: straight element at oblong hole).

Proceed as described above for this element.

Press "Confirm processing for this element": press Yes.

Press Finished, Elements finished.

The added processing is transferred to all equal elements. All
processings are shown in cyan.

Changing number of tools,

processing rounding

10. If the rounding has been processed with "Square 10": press
Number of tools.

To display the processing of the rounding: press Previous

or Next repeatedly.
In the Tools already used in part list, the tool for the rounding is
marked with a star.

Press Delete.
Processing with this tool is removed.

Press Add.
"Tools" opens.

In the selection list: select Square 5 mm.

Select OK.

Press Recalculate.

Press Finished.
The processing is recalculated. The processing of the rounding
is executed using "Square 5".

48

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

Concluding processing

11. Press Part finished.

The entire sheet is displayed.
12. Press Continue.
"Trimming" is displayed.
13. Press Continue.
14. Confirm the message for repositioning with Yes.
"Optimization" is displayed.

Optimizing the processing sequence

1. Press Slitting sequence.

Press Meander top left.

Press Continue.
2. Enter "Optimization parameters":

"Grouping of rows": 2.
"Tool sequence" opens.
3. Press Previous tool.
In the list of tools already used, the "*" symbol wanders downwards by one position. The tool is marked.
4. Press Tool to the bottom.
The marked tool is sorted in the list by one position downwards.
5. Press Continue.
The "Simulation of tool change" message list is displayed.
6. Select OK.
"Simulation" is displayed.

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

49

Simulating processing
1. Either
Press Next processing.
The simulation is displayed step-for-step.
or
Keep key <6> on the keyboard pressed down.
The longer the key is pressed down, the quicker the simulation
proceeds.
2. To the start the simulation from the beginning: press Simulation to start.
3. Press Continue.
"Generate NC Program" is displayed (see Section 4, p. 56).

50

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

3.2

Example: programming bending part

Creating new sheet

1. Press New sheet.
2. Enter machine and sheet data:

"Machine": TruPunch 1000.

Material ID: ST37-20.

"XxYxZ": 2000x1000x2 mm.

3. Enter margins:

"Left": 20 mm.

"Right": 20 mm.

"Top": 20 mm.
4. To set the lower margin: press on the lower icon under "Block
clamping range".

Enter 100 mm.

5. Press Continue.
The empty sheet is displayed.

Loading part
1. Press Load part.
2. Select the 'Kiste.geo' file.
3. Select OK.
The part is displayed under Part information.
4. Enter part information:

"Number of pieces": 2.

"Angle": 0.
5. Enter web width for parts:

"X": 15 mm.

"Y": 15 mm.

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

51

Laying out the sheet

1. To change the start corner: press Start corner.
2. Press Top left.
3. Press Continue.
The sheet layout is displayed:

Fig. 46545

4. Press Continue, Continue.

The final sheet layout is displayed.
5. Press Continue to technology.
"Separating strategy" is opened.

Defining slitting strategy

Press Grid.
"Automatic processing" is displayed.

52

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

Processing parts automatically

1. To create your own tooling list: press Tooling lists.
"Tooling list management" is opened.
2. Select New.
"Create new tooling list" is opened.
3. Enter name: e.g. User1.
4. In the tooling list: select Circular 20 mm.
5. Select Undo.
6. Define the tooling lists for automatic processing:

Single hole: select User1.

Notch: select Trumpf.

Contour: select Trumpf.

7. Press Edit.
Automatic processing begins. The tools already used are
displayed. The processed parts are shown in red.
Note
Tooling lists can still be changed at the present time for processings shown in red. Undo cancels the complete processing.
All processings are shown in cyan after the next step. The
named actions are then no longer an option.

Fig. 46546

8. Press Continue.
"Trimming" is displayed.

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

53

Trimming sheets
1. Press Trimming, Strategy, U stripes.
2. Press Tool.
3. In the selection list: select Rectangle 70x5 mm.
4. Select OK.
5. Press Continue.
The start part (magenta color) at which the trimming cut begins
is suggested.
6. Press Continue.
The start part is confirmed.
7. To define the end part at the bottom right on the sheet: press
Previous repeatedly.
The end part (magenta color) at which the trimming cut ends is
suggested.
8. Press Continue.
9. Confirm the messages for the trimming edge with Yes and OK.
The trimming edge is displayed.
10. Press Continue.
11. Confirm the message for repositioning with Yes.
"Optimization" is displayed.

Optimizing the processing sequence

1. Press Slitting sequence.

Press Meander top left.

Press Continue.
2. Enter "Optimization parameters":

"Grouping of rows": 1.
"Tool sequence" opens.
3. Press Previous tool.
In the list of tools already used, the "*" symbol wanders downwards by one position. The tool is marked.

54

Simple programming

S580EN.DOC

4. Press Tool to the bottom.

The marked tool is sorted in the list by one position downwards.
5. Press Continue.
The "Simulation of tool change" message list is displayed.
6. Select OK.
"Simulation" is displayed.

Simulating processing
1. Either
Press Next processing.
The simulation is displayed step-for-step.
or
Keep key <6> on the keyboard pressed down.
The longer the key is pressed down, the quicker the simulation
proceeds.
2. To the start the simulation from the beginning: press Simulation to start.
3. Press Continue.
"Generate NC Program" is displayed (see Section 4, p. 56).

S580EN.DOC

Simple programming

55

4.

Generating an NC Program

4.1

Defining settings

Select "Settings".

Connection between name of "NC file" and "Program name"

Machines with Bosch
control systems

TruTops uses the digits from the name of the NC file. If the name
of the NC file contains no digits, then TruTops will use the date and
the time in sequence to generate a name that is as unequivocal as
possible.
The program name and the name of the NC file can be modified at
any time (see following pages).
For machines with Bosch control systems, only numerical program
names (digits) can be used.

Machines with Siemens

control systems

For machines with Siemens control systems and alphanumeric

program names, TruTops offers the name of the NC file as the
default program name.
Note
With alphanumeric program names no distinction is made between
lower case and upper case letters.
Modifying the name of the NC file
TruTops uses the following NC file names:

The file name of the first loaded part when generating multicopy areas.

The sheet name of the respective sheet when machining a

nesting job.

1. Delete the names to be found under "NC file".

2. Enter New name.

Modifying NC program path

TruTops offers in the default settings the NC program path
'/TRUMPF.NET/Workfiles/user1/'.
1. Open "NC program path" with ">".
The file browser opens.
2. Select New directory.
3. Select OK.
TruTops shows the new path under "NC program path."

56

Generating an NC Program

S580EN.DOC

Defining path for saving setup plan

TruTops offers in the default settings the path for setup plan
'/TRUMPF.NET/Workfiles/user1/'.
1. Put a check mark at "Path for setup plan".
2. Open "Path for set-up plan" with >.
The file browser opens.
3. Select New directory.
4. Select OK.
TruTops shows the new path under "Path for setup plan".

Modifying program name

1. Delete old program name.
2. Enter new program name.
Note
For machines with Bosch control systems, only numerical
program names (digits) can be used.

NC title, customer, programmer, remark ...

TruTops writes this information in the setup plan. The remarks for
the setup plan are self-holding until they are overwritten by new
text.
Enter the desired information.

Defining additional settings

1. Go to one of the tabs "Parameters", "Subroutine techn.",
"Laser" or "Setup plan" (see following descriptions).
2. Select OK.
TruTops generates the NC program.

S580EN.DOC

Generating an NC Program

57

4.2

Defining parameters

Select "Parameters".
Parameter

Effect

Number of program runs

Indicates how often the NC program at the machine is to be executed. The

information is outputted in the setup plan.
If a production plan has been created with TruTops or NcLink, then the NC
program will be executed accordingly often, one time after another, as
specified in the NC program.

Monitoring clamp positions

The machine executes the clamp checking program with position monitoring.

Monitor space between clamps

The machine executes the clamp checking program with space monitoring.

Prepare loading at end of program

Useful when the NC program is to be executed several times in succession.

The loading of the next identical sheet starts immediately at the end of the
NC program even while the sheet is still being processed.

Reload first tool at end of program

Useful when the NC program is to be executed several times in succession.

The first tool in the NC program will be automatically newly mounted at the
end of the NC program.

Use M24

Using high number of strokes.

Block numbering

To reduce the file size of the NC program: deselect option.

Transferring technology data

The laser technology data and the basic tooling data are transferred to the
machine. Depending on the machine setting, the data is then adopted only if
it is not yet present at the machine.

Transferring push-out subroutine

The standard push-out subroutine Q9998 is outputted.

Transferring sheet layout subroutine

The sheet layout subroutine "P9994" is applied to the control system of the
machine with this option. It must be applied after each initial installation or
after each update. The sheet layout subroutine is the user interface for the
layout with single parts.

Overwriting NC files without warning

The message "Do you wish to overwrite" will not be displayed.

NC post-processing program

The post-processing program is started immediately after the generation of

the NC program (see Section below).

Starting transfer immediately

The mask for data transfer is automatically opened after the generation of the
NC program. The NC program can be copied or moved into the transfer
folder.
Table 3

58

Generating an NC Program

S580EN.DOC

Using NC post-processing
programs

Entries for post-processing programs or complete post-processing

programs are supplied with TruTops. Post-processing programs
are started directly after the NC program is generated.
TruTops Punch contains as default settings the following NC postprocessing programs:
Name of the NC post-processing
program
Open NC program using an editor.

LST_EDITOR

Print the NC program with the

default printer.

STD_PRINTER

STD_PRINTER_MO

(MO = modal, i.e. TruTops waits while

the NC program is being printed)
INTERNETEDITOR
Collect data for printing labels.

PREPARE_LABEL

NC post-processing programs

Table 4

Example: the NC text is to be opened and printed with the

"Notepad" editor after the NC program is generated.

1. Select "NC post-processing program".

2. Open the input box with >.
"Program selection" opens.
3. Make a check mark at NC post-processing program (here:
STD_PRINTER).
TruTops imports the STD_PRINTER in the input box.

Using one's own postprocessing programs

S580EN.DOC

You can create your own NC post-processing programs and add

them to the selection list (see TruTops software manual, Data
module).
TruTops then offers these post-processing programs here.

Generating an NC Program

59

4.3

Defining options for subroutine

technique

Subroutine technique means: certain processing sequences which

are repeatedly executed on a single sheet are written in a separate
program (subroutine). This subroutine can be called up repeatedly
within the main program.

1. Select "Subroutine techn.".

2. Either
Select "Part-oriented".
The NC program is generated in a part-oriented manner. This
means that the system is searched within a multi-copy area for
identical processing sequences, which are written in the subroutine according to the defined rules.

Enter "Minimum number of machining operations for a subroutine".

Enter "Minimum number of activations for a subroutine".

or
Select "Compulsory sequence".
The machining operations in compulsory sequences are
written into subroutines.

4.4

Defining vaporizing with the laser

Prerequisite

The "Vaporizing" option is activated (Rule).

1. Select "Laser".
Note
The options under "Vaporizing" control the automatic vaporizing of all laser contours. No manually programmed vaporizing
is affected by this, neither "Sheetwise" nor "Partwise".
2. Select "Vaporizing" "No" or "Sheetwise" or "Partwise".

60

Generating an NC Program

S580EN.DOC

4.5

Defining options for outputting the

setup plan

Select "Setup plan".

(refer to TruTops software manual)

4.6

Sending the NC program to the

machine

1. Select the "Parameters" tab.

Select "Start transfer immediately".

Select OK.
TruTops displays the "NC file transfer" mask.
Note
'C:\DH\ToPsmanu.dir' is the default directory for NC programs
on the machine.

"NC file transfer"

Selecting the NC program

Fig. 27067EN

2. Open "Source file name" with >.

The TruTops file browser is displayed.
3. Search the file if necessary.
4. Mark the NC program ('.lst') you are searching for.
5. Select OK.
TruTops displays the "NC file transfer" mask again. The file
name and the path of the NC program are entered under
"Source file".

S580EN.DOC

Generating an NC Program

61

Changing the target directory

on the machine

When transferring, TruTops always offers the directory that is

entered for the machine (see TruTops software manual, Data
module).
Note
'C:\DH\ToPsmanu.dir' is the default directory for NC programs on
the machine.

1. To define the target directory permanently: select Data module,

Machines >Data, Basic machine, Data 7, "Name of transfer
path".
2. To modify the destination directory on a short-term basis (until
next time the machine is changed): open "Target directory"
via >.
TruTops displays the "Select directory" mask.
3. Select directory.
4. Select OK.
The "NC file transfer" mask will be displayed again. The new
target directory is entered. It remains in effect until the next
time the machine is exchanged.

Starting transfer

1. To send a copy of the NC program to the machine: select

"Copy".
or

To send the original of the NC program to the machine:

select "Pan".

2. To transfer additional NC programs after transferring the first

NC program, deactivate "Close dialog after transfer".
3. Select Transfer.
The data is transferred to the machine.

62

Generating an NC Program

S580EN.DOC

5.

Glossary

Term

Icon

Action/Explanation

Bend factors

During bending, the material is stretched or flattened. The change in the workpiece length during the bending process is compensated with the use of socalled bend factors.
To enable the finished bent workpiece to correspond with the required dimensions, the dimensions of the flat blank are automatically shortened or extended
by the bend factors.

Manage bend factor

Opens the database for bend factors.

Other flange

Opens a navigation window for single selection of the flange to be changed:

Relief grooves

Manage relief grooves

Base

A relief groove is a "small notch". It reduces deformation of the edge or corner

during bending.
Opens the database for relief grooves.

A bending part comprises of a base and a random amount of flanges. The base
is the surface in the drawing from where the most important or most bends start
out.
If the base is determined in the construction drawing of a bending part, then
several flanges are added to this.

TruTops start menu

Goes to TruTops start mask.

Manage

Opens the database for bend factors or relief grooves.

Continue in TruTops

Goes to TruTops basic or into the TruTops full version.

Table 5

S580EN.DOC

Glossary

63

64

Glossary

S580EN.DOC

Update information

TruTops CAD
Version 4.1

Update information

TruTops CAD
Version 4.1

Edition 2008-03-20

Order Information

Please specify when ordering this document:

Update information
TruTops CAD
Edition 2008-03-20
Document number U523

Address for orders

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG

Technische Dokumentation
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
D-71254 Ditzingen
Fon: +49 (0) 71 56 /3 03-0
Fax: +49 (0) 71 56 /3 03-5 40
Internet: http://www.trumpf.com
E-Mail: [email protected]

This document was compiled by the Technical Documentation Dept.

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG.

of

All rights, in particular the right to reproduce, distribute or translate this

documentation,
are
reserved
to
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen
GmbH + Co. KG, even in case of patent and industrial rights applications. No
part of this documentation may be reproduced, processed, duplicated or
distributed by means of electronic systems in any form whatsoever without the
prior written consent of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG
Subject to errors and technical changes.
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG cannot be held responsible
for possible mistakes in this documentation. Any warranty for direct and
indirect damages, arising in connection with the delivery or the use of this
documentation, is excluded, as far as this is in conformity with the law.

Table of contents
1.
1.1
1.2

1.3
1.4
1.5

1.6
1.7

U523EN

2008-03-20

Basics .................................................................................6
Working with selection preview............................................6
Activating selection preview ...........................................7
Selecting units .....................................................................8
Multiple selection ............................................................8
Fixed multiple selection ..................................................8
Switching between multiple selection and fixed
multiple selection ............................................................9
Switching back to individual selection ............................9
Marking all elements.......................................................9
User-defined settings........................................................ 10
TruTops file browser ......................................................... 10
PDM (product data management) .................................... 10
Creating and restoring file versions (PDM) ................. 11
Tips & Tricks ................................................................ 13
The calculator ................................................................... 14
Setting the angle increment of the wheel mouse.............. 14

2.
2.1

Opening and saving files ............................................... 15

Extracting parts from drawings in foreign format
and saving as GEO........................................................... 15

3.

Generate single holes, a circle of holes , and

3.1

rows of holes (macros) .................................................. 17

Defining tool drawing as base element............................. 17

4.
4.1

Machining several outer contours ................................ 18

Zooming outer contour...................................................... 18

5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

Bending lines .................................................................. 19

Creating bending lines ...................................................... 19
Removing bending line marking ....................................... 20
Modifying development..................................................... 20
Generating bending notches............................................. 21

Table of contents

1.
NEW

Basics
Display of actions with the mouse directly on the cursor or
screen.
Select elements, contours etc. sequentially and then modify
them, delete them, etc.
Set angle increment for mouse wheel.

1.1

Working with selection preview

With selection preview, actions which are performed with the

mouse are visible immediately on the cursor or on the screen.
Function

Screen/cursor display

Measuring

The current
Length, point, circle
measurement results
measurements
are shown on the cursor

Unit selection
(elements, bendings,
contours etc.)

Units are highlighted in

color

Deleting contours,
creating bending lines,
stretching

Unit selection

The number of selected

units is shown on the
cursor

Deleting elements,
moving, smoothing

Corner selection

The corner and both

corner elements are
highlighted in color

Creating roundings,
bevels, notches

Position selection

Special element points

(see following table) are
caught and are
displayed on the cursor

Creating points, line 2

points, curve center
radius

Selection preview options

Basics

Example

Tab. 1

2008-03-20

U523EN

Special element points:

Point

Affected elements

Symbol

End point

Line, bevel, curve, rounding

Square

Center

Circle, auxiliary circle, curve,

rounding

Square

Intersecting point

All elements

Text: "x" and

large circle

Center element

Line, bevel, curve, rounding

Text: "1/2"

0 degree position

Circle, auxiliary circle, curve,

rounding

Text: "0"

90 degree
position

Circle, auxiliary circle, curve,

rounding

Text: "90"

180 degree
position

Circle, auxiliary circle, curve,

rounding

Text: "180"

270 degree
position

Circle, auxiliary circle, curve,

rounding

Text: "270"

Other element
point

All elements

Small circle

Element points

Tab. 2

Activating selection preview

Select >Edit >Selection preview.
Selection preview is active (a check mark appears in front of
the menu item).

U523EN

2008-03-20

Basics

1.2

Selecting units

Units such as elements, contours, bendings or points can be

selected and modified individually (individual selection). Multiple
selection is a further option. For this they are firstly selected one
after the other and are then modified.

Multiple selection
Elements are selected one after the other and are then modified for
multiple selection. Selecting the element once again undoes the
selection.
1. Function, e.g. delete, select elements.
2. Press the <Ctrl> key.
The * symbol on the cursor shows that multiple selection mode
is active.
3. Select the elements to be deleted.
The selected elements are marked in color. If >Selection
preview is active, the number of selected elements is displayed
on the cursor.
4. Select OK.
The selected elements are deleted.

Fixed multiple selection

When this mode is selected an element cannot be deselected once
it has been selected. This is only possible by changing over to
multiple selection mode.
1. Function, e.g. delete, select elements.
2. Press the <Shift> key.
The + symbol on the cursor shows that fixed multiple selection
mode is active.
3. Select the elements to be deleted.
The selected elements are marked in color. If >Selection
preview is active, the number of selected elements is displayed
on the cursor.
4. Select OK.
The selected elements are deleted.

Basics

2008-03-20

U523EN

Switching between multiple selection and

fixed multiple selection
1. Select elements.
2. Press the <Ctrl> or< Shift> key to switch to the other mode.
The selected mode is indicated by the symbol on the cursor.

Switching back to individual selection

Either
Select >Edit >Unmark.
or
Release the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key.
Reselect the selected elements.
The elements are displayed in black again.

Marking all elements

All drawn elements are marked using this function. Individual
elements can then be deselected.
Select >Edit >Mark all.
All elements are marked.
Tip
With All the selected function, e.g. delete, is executed immediately
for all units.

U523EN

2008-03-20

Basics

1.3
NEW

User-defined settings

Every application is opened once after the initial installation of

TruTops version 1.2.
After an update or a reinstallation, all applications open in the
same status that they were in before the update/reinstallation
(type, quantity and names of applications).

1.4
Quick access to folders

Quick access to a folder in the TruTops file browser is possible as

follows:
Open file browser (e.g. via >File >Open).
Keep the <Shift> key pressed and press the <Tab> key twice
or click directly in the file list using the mouse.
Enter the first letters of the desired folder until the required
folder is marked.

1.5
NEW

10

Basics

TruTops file browser

PDM (product data management)

File versions can be created, archived and restored in TruTops

with PDM.

2008-03-20

U523EN

Creating and restoring file versions (PDM)

Displaying and hiding the version window

Displaying and hiding the

version window
2

Button to create a file version

Directory contents (file list)

Select the file whose version is

to be created and archived

Version window (archive)

File versions in version window

Fig. 50219en

File versions are displayed in a separate version window. The

version window is displayed in the TruTops file browser (with PDM)
by default.
To hide and then display the version window: select
(Version window).

U523EN

2008-03-20

Basics

11

Creating a file version

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Select the file whose version is to be created.
3. Either
Select
(Create version).
or
Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Select >Create version.
The "Properties... - Version x" mask, "Version info" tab is
displayed.
4. If required, enter (the required) information about the new
version.
5.
Select OK. (Cancel aborts the input of the information but not
the creation of the file version.)
The file version is displayed in a separate version window (see
"Fig. 50219en", pg. 11).

Restoring a file version

Note
If a file version is to be changed (e.g. contours are to be deleted or
added), the file version must be copied from the version window
into the normal directory. File versions cannot be directly opened
from the version window.
1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Select the file whose versions have been created.
All file versions of the selected file are displayed in the version
window (see "Fig. 50219en", pg. 11).
3. Select the file version to be restored.
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Either
In order to copy the file version from the version window
into the normal directory under its original file name (so
that the file version can be opened with the appropriate
application): select >Restore.
Replying to an inquiry:
Yes: A version is created from the file from the normal
directory and it is stored in the version window.
No: The file in the normal directory is overwritten with
the file version.
or
In order to copy the file version into the normal directory
under another file name (so that the file version can be
opened with the appropriate application): select >Restore
under....

12

Basics

2008-03-20

U523EN

The "New file name" mask is displayed.

Change the suggested file name if required.
6. Select OK.
The restored file is displayed in the normal directory and can be
opened with the appropriate application (e.g. TruTops CAD).
Deleting a file version
1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File
browser).
2. Select the file whose versions have been created.
All file versions that have been created by the selected file are
displayed in the version window (see "Fig. 50219en", pg. 11).
3. Select the file version to be deleted.
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Select >Delete.

Tips & Tricks

Archiving the copies of a file
Earlier, variants of a file had to be saved as copies under different
names (see "Fig. 53348", pg. 13).
But now, variants of a file can be archived together as file
versions under one name. Only the current status of a file is
displayed in the file list of the TruTops file browser and the file
versions are in the version window (see "Fig. 50219en", pg. 11).
The following gives an example of how an (old) copy of a file
('egon1.geo') can be created as a file version of the current status
('egon.geo').

Latest status of the file

Copy of a file (old status)

Variants of a file in the file list

Fig. 53348

1. Open the TruTops file browser (e.g. through >File >File

browser).
2. Create a file version of 'egon1.geo' (right click to open the
context menu, select >Create version).
A file version is stored in the version window of 'egon1.geo'
which is identical to 'egon1.geo'.

U523EN

2008-03-20

Basics

13

3. Open 'egon.geo' and save it as 'egon1.geo'.

When overwriting, 'egon1.geo' in the file list is overwritten. The
file version of 'egon1.geo' in the version window is retained.
'Egon1.geo' has the current status. The old status of the file
version is located in the version window.
4. Delete 'egon.geo'.
5. Rename 'egon1.geo' as 'egon.geo.'
6. If several files are to be archived together:

Create a version of the oldest file and overwrite it with the

second oldest file. (This ensures that the file versions in
the version window are stored in the right sequence).

Repeat the process till all file versions in the version

window have been archived together.

Then rename the file in the file list whose versions are
currently present.

1.6
NEW

The calculator

Keyboard added for operation:

Closing the calculator,
<Ctrl>+<Enter> ( ).

1.7

adopting

the

input:

press

Setting the angle increment of the

wheel mouse

1. Select >Tools >Presettings >Wheel mouse angle increment

(only in the Punch application).
or
Select >Tools >Wheel mouse angle increment (only in the
CAD, Laser, Nest applications).
or
Select >Tools >Parameters >Wheel mouse angle
increment (only in the Tube application).
2. Either
Select the desired value.
or
Select >more....
Enter the desired angle and confirm with OK.
The angle increment is changed for all TruTops functions.

14

Basics

2008-03-20

U523EN

2.
NEW

Opening and saving files

The sequence of extracting parts from drawings in foreign
format has changed.. First the elements to be saved must be
selected. Then the file browser opens. It automatically
suggests a file name consisting of the name of the loaded
drawing and the extension '_1' etc.

2.1

Extracting parts from drawings in

foreign format and saving as GEO

The assistant for the layout can be used to extract single parts
from drawings in foreign format one after the other and to save
them as *.GEO. The process can be repeated till all parts are
extracted from a drawing.
If all parts from a drawing are to be saved as *.GEOs: select
>Assistants >Layout >Extract sheet >Sheet all (see the next
section).
If the sheet layout is not relevant, the option for saving the sheet
file (*.TAF) can be deselected here.
Extracting selected
elements/entire parts

U523EN

2008-03-20

1. Load drawing in foreign format.

2. If required, select >Assistants >Layout >Find equals.
(If a saved part is present in the drawing several times, the
copies too are found in the same manner).
3. To mark single elements that should belong to one *.GEO:
select >Assistants >Layout >Extract part >Part element.
(>Part element is useful only if the parts in the drawing are not
nested very close to one another.)
or
To save full parts as *.GEO (including all the inside
contours, texts or points contained in it): select >Assistants
>Layout >Extract part >Part contour .
(>Part contour is useful only if the outer contour of the part
is correctly drawn and has no gaps, for example.)
4. For >Part element: click all elements that should belong to
*.GEO one after the other, and press the <Ctrl> key at the
same time.
or
For >Part contour: click on the outer contour of the part
that is to be saved as *.GEO.
(Clicking several times while holding the <Ctrl> key makes it
possible to deselect selected elements; see the section on
multiple selections.)

Opening and saving files

15

Note
If the <Ctrl> key is not pressed, only one element can be
selected. The assistant proceeds immediately with this
selection.
5. After the selection is completed: Press <Enter> or <Return>
( ).
or
Select OK.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
6. Enter the file name for the new *.GEO.
The first time elements of a drawing are saved, the path from
which the drawing was opened and the file type (*.geo) are
present. In addition, the previous name with the extension _1
is shown as file name. Example: 'J:\teile\test_1.geo' when
'J:\teile\test.dxf' was loaded. The index increases by one at
each additional save (via >Save >Selection or >Assistants
>Layout).
7. Select OK.
The *.GEO is saved.
The saved part obtains a characteristic that groups the
elements of the part in the drawing into one unit . In the "fixed"
characteristic setting, certain actions are therefore either
applied to the entire unit, (i.e. on all elements) or the actions
are declined.
If Highlight characteristics is active, the saved parts with a
characteristic are highlighted with a color in the loaded
drawing.

Showing storage location

and part names

16

If >Find equals is activated, copies of the part are searched for

(independent of the position and turning position) and
highlighted with a color as well.
8. Select >Assistants >Layout >Show part names.
9. Click on the part whose file name and storage location is to be
shown.
The storage location and the file name are shown.

Opening and saving files

2008-03-20

U523EN

3.

NEW

Generate single holes, a circle of holes

, and rows of holes (macros)
Define place holder for strokes with a forming tool.

3.1

Defining tool drawing as base element

Condition
The drawing is open.
Note
This function is activated only in TruTops Punch.
1. Select >Create >Macros >Parameter....
2. Select the "Tool" tab.
3. Either
Select a tool.
or
Select a forming tool.
Under "Display as" select the display form, e.g. graphic,
point, identity number, or comment.
Select OK.
Use the left mouse button to define the position of the
stroke.
The stroke is displayed in accordance with the selection, e.g.
as an identity number.
4. Select OK.
The base element is defined.
5. Create a single hole, circles of holes, row of holes or hole grid.

U523EN

2008-03-20

Generate single holes, a circle of holes , and rows of

holes (macros)

17

4.
NEW

Machining several outer contours

Better appearance of outer contours through zoom function.

4.1

Zooming outer contour

Select >Assistants >Outer contours >Zoom.

The outer contour selected is displayed as large as possible.

18

Machining several outer contours

2008-03-20

U523EN

5.
NEW

Bending lines
Determine bend radius and bend factor automatically
(condition: connected to Tru Tops Bend database).
Remove marking from bending lines.
Change bend factor for bending line.
Generate notches on bending lines that do not end at a
contour.

5.1

Creating bending lines

Condition
The drawing must contain a colored line (e.g. cyan).
Notes
Bending lines are automatically adjusted to the contour.
The pre-angle applies to pre-bending if the Pre-bending and
post-bending technique is selected. The opening angle
corresponds to the end angle.
The bending radius is important for display. If the notches are
not large enough, a small bending radius must be selected,
since otherwise problems occur when creating the bending
part (as long as this edge is not contacted).
Geometries should not have drawing parts outside the
unfolding and the bending lines. If foreign format such as IGS,
DXF are imported, the drawing frames, views, fonts, etc. must
be removed from the drawing.
When selecting the bending tools, the selection can be limited
further to material and thickness due to a TruTops bending
tooling list.
Fist formula for bending radius: notch and sheet thickness
should be greater than the bending radius.
1. Select >Bend >Bending >Create.
The "Define bending lines" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the appropriate values.

"Bending radius": The bending radius is limited to the tool

radius.

"Bend factor": Not converted for acute angles.

Tip
Once Tru Tops CAD is connected to a Tru Tops Bend
database, the bend radius and bend factor for the bending line
can be determined automatically with the button Auto.
3. Select upper and lower tools.

U523EN

2008-03-20

Bending lines

19

4. Select "Bending type", "Bending technique" and "Bending

method".

Folding(bending type): 180 for opening angle and

preangle.
5. Select OK.
6. Click on the line drawn in cyan.
The line is defined as a bending line and displayed by the program
in green.

5.2

Removing bending line marking

With this function, the marking of bending lines is undone.

1. Select "Bend""Bending"Remove marking.
2. Click the bending line whose marking is to be removed.
The bending line marking is removed and the line is shown in
green.

5.3

Modifying development

A new bend factor can be entered for each bending line. The
drawing is adapted automatically.
Entering new bend factors

Combining bendings

Setting automatic bending

notches

20

Bending lines

1. Select Modify development.

The "Modify development" mask is displayed.
2. Select the desired bending line.
3. Enter the new bend factor under "New".
4. Select Set.
The new bend factor is shown in the list of bending lines.
5. Select OK.
The development is recalculated and the drawing adapted.
6. In the "Modify development" mask, select "Combine bendings".
All bendings with the same bending angle and die are
combined.
7. Select "Set automatic bending notches".
Once this box has been selected, the unfolding is modified and
at the same time a bending notch is set automatically.

2008-03-20

U523EN

5.4

Generating bending notches

Bends on sharp corners and bends that do not end exactly at a

contour can be notched with this function.
1. Select Bending notches.
2. Click on the bending line.
Depending on whether a notch is necessary or not (decided by
TruTops), corners or contours where the bending line ends are
notched.

U523EN

2008-03-20

Bending lines

21

22

Bending lines

2008-03-20

U523EN

Update information

TruTops CAD
Version 5.0

Update information

TruTops CAD
Version 5.0

Edition 2009-02-23

Order Information

Please specify when ordering this document:

Update information
TruTops CAD
Edition 2009-02-23
Document number U523DE

Address for orders

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG

Technische Dokumentation
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
D-71254 Ditzingen
Fon: +49 7156 303 - 0
Fax: +49 7156 303 - 30540
Internet: http://www.trumpf.com
E-Mail: [email protected]

This document was compiled by the Technical Documentation Dept.

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG.

of

All rights, in particular the right to reproduce, distribute or translate this documentation, are reserved to TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG,
even in case of patent and industrial rights applications. No part of this documentation may be reproduced, processed, duplicated or distributed by means
of electronic systems in any form whatsoever without the prior written consent
of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Subject to errors and technical changes.
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG cannot be held responsible
for possible mistakes in this documentation. Any warranty for direct and indirect damages, arising in connection with the delivery or the use of this documentation, is excluded, as far as this is in conformity with the law.

Table of contents
1.
1.1

Basics .................................................................................6
Contour points .....................................................................6

2.
2.1
2.2

Opening and saving files ..................................................7

Loading BMT files ................................................................7
Loading DXF files ................................................................7
Loading DXF files with deactivated layers......................7
Loading DXF files with a single block .............................8
Extracting parts from drawings in foreign format
and saving as GEO..............................................................8

2.3

U523EN

2009-02-23

3.

Dimensioning geometries.............................................. 10

4.
4.1

Creating profiles ............................................................. 11

Working in the profile editor .............................................. 11
Open profile editor ....................................................... 11
Opening and saving profiles ........................................ 12
Creating a profile ......................................................... 12
Modifying a profile........................................................ 14
Deleting a profile.......................................................... 16
Profile table.................................................................. 17

Table of contents

1.
NEW

Basics

When catching positions (e.g. line 2 points), original points of a

corner (virtual corners) which have been grasped, rounded off
or notched, are caught. The center of a notch is also considered a virtual corner. A small "v" on the cursor indicates that a
virtual corner has been caught.

Bending lines are not included when contour points are shown
(>View >Open points or >All points)t. Both ends are normally
shown as cyan colored crosses.

1.1
Point

Contour points
Description

Green

Closed contour point.

Red

Open contour point.

Yellow

More than two contour elements are attached to one

point.

Cyan

The center of circles, arcs and radius corners and the

end of bendings.
Tab. 1

Basics

2009-02-23

U523EN

2.
NEW

Opening and saving files

Geometries from BMT files (from TruTops Bend) can be
loaded via the file browser in TruTops CAD.

2.1

Loading BMT files

1. Select >File, >Open.

The file browser opens.
2. Under "File type", select BMT files.
All BMT files are displayed.
3. Select the desired file.
4. Select OK.
The file unfolding opens.

2.2

Loading DXF files

Loading DXF files with deactivated layers

In AutoCad individual layers can be deactivated so that they are no
longer visible. In TruTops CAD these deactivated can be displayed
and reloaded.
1. Select >File, >Open.
The file browser opens.
2. Under "File type"
select DXF files.
All DXF files are displayed.
3. Select the desired file.
4. Select OK.
The "DXF/DWG - Loading options" screen opens.
5. Select "Transfer only specific layers".
The list field "Layers for transfer" is displayed.
6. Check the "display deactivated" checkbox to display deactivated layers.
7. Mark the layers to be loaded.
8. Select OK.
The DXF file opens with the corresponding layers.

U523EN

2009-02-23

Opening and saving files

Loading DXF files with a single block

1. Select "Adopt only single block" to load DXF files with a single
block.
2. Select block.
3. Select OK.
The file is opened, the block colors are observed and displayed.

2.3

Extracting parts from drawings in

foreign format and saving as GEO

The assistant for the layout can be used to extract single parts
from drawings in foreign format one after the other and to save
them as *.GEO. The process can be repeated till all parts are extracted from a drawing.
If all parts from a drawing are to be saved as *.GEOs: select >Assistants >Layout >Extract sheet >Sheet all (see the next section).
If the sheet layout is not relevant, the option for saving the sheet
file (*.TAF) can be deselected here.
Extracting selected
elements/entire parts

Note
Single parts can be saved one after the other without having to
reselect the function (>Assistants >Layout >Extract parts >Part
element).
The process is ended with Cancel or by selecting a new function.
For both the >Part element and >Part contour function, elements are selected which are to be saved as a part. For both
functions, it is possible to add further elements or to deselect
selected elements.
1. Load drawing in foreign format.
2. If required, select >Assistants >Layout >Find equals.
(If a saved part is present in the drawing several times, the
copies too are found in the same manner).
Note
In >Part element, selections are made via a Box, in which all
elements desired are selected.
If the <Ctrl> key is not pressed, only one element can be selected. The assistant proceeds immediately with this selection.
In >Part contour a single contour is picked, its elements and all
directly contained inner contours and texts are selected.
3. To mark single elements that should belong to one *.GEO:
select >Assistants >Layout >Extract part >Part element.
(>Part element is useful only if the parts in the drawing are not
nested very close to one another.)

Opening and saving files

2009-02-23

U523EN

or
To save entire parts as a *.GEO: select >Assistants
>Layout >Extract part >Part contour.
(>Part contour is useful only if the outer contour of the part
is correctly drawn and has no gaps, for example.)
4. Click all elements that should belong to *.GEO one after the
other, and press the <Ctrl> key at the same time.
(Clicking several times while holding the <Ctrl> key makes it
possible to deselect selected elements; see the section on
multiple selections.)
5. After the selection is completed: Press <Enter> or <Return> (
).
or
Select OK.
The file browser opens.
6. Enter the file name for the new *.GEO.
The first time elements of a drawing are saved, the path from
which the drawing was opened and the file type (*.geo) are
present. In addition, the previous name with the extension _1
is shown as file name. Example: 'J:\teile\test_1.geo' when
'J:\teile\test.dxf' was loaded. The index increases by one at
each additional save (via >Save >Selection or >Assistants
>Layout).
7. Select OK.
The *.GEO is saved.
The saved part obtains a characteristic that groups the elements of the part in the drawing into one unit . In the "fixed"
characteristic setting, certain actions are therefore either applied to the entire unit, (i.e. on all elements) or the actions are
declined.
If Highlight characteristics is active, the saved parts with a
characteristic are highlighted with a color in the loaded drawing.

Showing storage location

and part names

U523EN

2009-02-23

If >Find equals is activated, copies of the part are searched for

(independent of the position and turning position) and highlighted with a color as well.
8. Select >Assistants >Layout >Show part names.
9. Click on the part whose file name and storage location is to be
shown.
The storage location and the file name are shown.

Opening and saving files

3.
NEW

10

Dimensioning geometries

Dimensioning geometries
For point dimensionings (2 points, short, axis), the special
points of elements such as center, 0 degree position etc., and
the original points of a corner (virtual corners) can also be dimensioned.

2009-02-23

U523EN

4.

Creating profiles

4.1

Working in the profile editor

Profiles can be generated easily and quickly in the profile editor.

Saved profiles can be opened and modified without difficulty. If the
sheet thickness is changed, for example, the profile is adapted
automatically.

Profile editor screen surface

Fig. 55275en

Open profile editor

Note
The material selection screen is only opened when the material
name or the material thickness is missing from properties.
1. Select >Bending, >Start profile editor.
The "Material selection" is opened.
2. Select material name and material thickness.
3. Select OK.
The profile editor is opened. The "Profile editor" screen appears
simultaneously, where the material is displayed on screen. Profile
segments can be entered via this screen.

U523EN

2009-02-23

Creating profiles

11

Opening and saving profiles

Opening a profile
1. Select >File, >Open.
"Open file" is opened.
2. Select the corresponding GEO file.
3. Select OK.
The profile unfolding appears.
4. Open profile editor.
The profile appears on the drawing sheet.

Saving a profile
1. Select >Bending, >Profile editor, >Change to unfolding.
The unfolding is created.
2. Select >File , >Save as.
"Save file" is opened.
3. Select *.GEO as "File type".
4. Enter the file name.
5. Select OK.

Creating a profile
Profiles can be created in one of two ways: via >Sketch or >Profile
table. Two items of profile table data must be entered per segment,
the remaining data is calculated automatically.
Different input formats can be used per segment.
Icon

Function
Sketch
Profile table (several options):

Input of angle and segment length.

Input of dx and dy horizontal and vertical
changes in distance between two points.
Input of dx or dy angle.
Tab. 2

12

Creating profiles

2009-02-23

U523EN

Sketching
A new profile can be drawn or further segments attached to an existing profile.
1. Select >Bending, >Profile editor, >Sketch.
The first mouse click (left mouse button) defines the origin. The
cursor is positioned at the desired point for further additional
segments.
When there is already an existing profile, the cursor is automatically placed at the previous segment and the new segment
can be drawn. The relevant data is stored in the profile table.
2. Position the cursor at the desired point and press the left
mouse button.
The segment is drawn and the length of the segment is displayed.
3. Select End.
The profile is drawn.

Profile table - e.g. enter angle and segment length

Each segment of the profile is defined by its length and position
(angle).
Programming the first
segment

1. Select Profile table.

2. Enter the first angle in relation to the coordinate system under
"Angle" and confirm with <Enter>.

Fig. 46120

3. Enter the "Segment length" and confirm with <Enter>.

The segment is drawn.

U523EN

2009-02-23

Creating profiles

13

Programming further
segments

4. Enter the other angles in relation to the previous segment and

confirm them with <Enter>.
5. Enter the "Segment length" of the other segments and confirm
with <Enter>.

Dimensioning from outside radius to outside radius

Fig. 46121

Modifying a profile
Edge mirroring
For edge mirroring the first segment is divided at the center and
the mirrored profile attached there. The origin is moved to the end
of the new part.

Edge mirroring

14

Fig. 55389

Creating profiles

2009-02-23

U523EN

Point mirroring
The profile is mirrored at its point of origin (at an angle of 170).
The origin is moved to the end of the added part and the "old" origin, like all segments, is renamed (In the below example the "old"
origin is now named "C"). The angle at C can be changed by
means of the profile table.

Point mirroring

Fig. 55390

Inverting
The origin is shifted to the end of the profile and the order of the
segments is reversed. This is useful if segments are to be added at
the origin as well.
Note
A new segment will always be attached to the last segment.
Rotating
The selected segment is rotated against the origin.
Showing dimensioning
The outer or inner dimension of the marked segment is shown depending on which dimensioning side was selected in the profile
table.

U523EN

2009-02-23

Creating profiles

15

Deleting a profile
Deleting an element
1. Select >Bending, >Profile editor, >Profile bending.
2. Select element.
All segments from the end of the profile to the marked segment are
deleted. In the case of an element, the preceding bending is also
deleted.

Deleting a profile
1. Select >Bending, >Profile editor, >Profile bending.
2. Select All.

16

Creating profiles

2009-02-23

U523EN

Profile table
A profile table is created automatically whenever the profile editor
is opened. To return from the settings to the unfolding, the Change
to unfolding button must be selected.
Whenever a profile is drawn, the corresponding data (angle, segment length, Dx, Dy) is automatically entered in the profile table.
These values can be edited at any time and the changes are
automatically applied to the drawn profile (absolute coordinate
system). The individual values can be selected with the cursor
keys.
Field

Description

Profile depth

The depth of the profile corresponds to the length

of the bending line.

Dimensioning side

Choice between inner and outer dimensioning.

Point

The origin and the bendings of the profile are

automatically named with consecutive letters and
are assigned to the respective angle in the table
(infinitely, AA is assigned after Z etc.).

Angle

The angle can be changed in the table. The value

and the profile are adapted.
Select the input field.
Enter the angle.
Select <Enter >.

Segment length

The segment length indicates the length of a segment, measured from outer edge to outer edge or
inner to inner edge. The length of the individual
segments can be changed.

Dx/Dy

The horizontal and vertical changes in distance

between two points are indicated by Dx/Dy.

Grayed out fields

The grayed out values from Dx and Dy can be

changed.
Select the respective gray field.
With the context menu open, select the lines
whose table values are to be changed (check
marks indicate the values to be changed). If the
first line is selected, the angle and segment
length values are applied to the profile. If the
fourth line is selected, the values for Dx and Dy
are applied. Irrelevant values are grayed out.
This button is used to open a new screen in which
the bending parameters are stored. They can be
edited here. The symbol on the button changes
depending on the type of bending.
Data relevant to the particular segment will be
displayed, such as type of bending, tool, angle etc.
If changes are made, they are reflected in the profile.
These buttons are used to switch forwards and
backwards between the individual bending operations.
Tab. 3

U523EN

2009-02-23

Creating profiles

17

Normal bending
Tool

Dimensioning method

The upper or lower tool is selected via the buttons or the selection
table. The tools are applied for all bendings with Apply to all.
Method

Description

Tangent

The program applies two tangents to the segments if the

bending is calculated with the "Tangent" dimensioning
method. The distance between both tangent intersection
points is dimensioned.

Radius

The distance between the radii (from outside) is dimensioned if the bending is calculated with the "Radius" dimensioning method.
Tab. 4

Note
Depending on the setting, TruTops CAD uses the Trumpf bend
allowances saved in the database for bend value (radius dimensioning method) or theoretical intersecting point (tangent dimensioning method) when creating an unfolding.
The bend allowances for the radius dimensioning method are always selected for angles <30.
The bending radius depends on the tool and the material thickness.
Angle

You can change the angle here.

Side length

Here you can change the lengths of the bordering segments (on
the selected angle).

Bending radius

You can enter the bending radius here. The default setting is 1.0
mm.
Round bending
If you select the "Round bending" bending type, two additional selection fields appear.

18

Creating profiles

2009-02-23

U523EN

Number of segments

Here you can enter the number of segments with which the round
bending is to be generated.
Note
If you change the number of segments for the bending operation,
the required length of the segments is calculated automatically.
TruTops Bend always selects a segment bending with whichever
tool is selected for the bending. A round tool is not selected.

Segment length

This field displays the length of the individual segments.

Note
If you change the length of the segments, the number of segments
is automatically adapted to generate the desired round bending.

Bending radius

The bend radius is particularly important for the round bending and
must not be confused with the angle.
Note
The material thickness is always added onto the entered bending
radius.

Round bending with 5 segments (90 angle and 30

bend radius + 2 mm sheet thickness)

U523EN

2009-02-23

Creating profiles

Fig. 41599

19

Folding
If you select the "Folding" bending type, the same options as for a
normal bend will appear. In addition, here you can specify the folding direction.
Note
If angle 0 is entered in the profile table, the folding bend type will
be selected automatically.
Folding direction

By entering the folding direction, "Up" or "Down", you can specify

the direction of the folding.
Note
For folding, the bend radius is added twice to the double material
thickness (height of the folding = 2x bending radius + 2x material
thickness).
A prebending at 30 is generated automatically for the folding when
developing the unfolding.

Top folding (0 angle, 0.05 mm bend radius, 2 mm

sheet thickness)

20

Creating profiles

2009-02-23

Fig. 41600

U523EN

Update information

TruTops CAD
Version 5.1

Update information

TruTops CAD
Version 5.1

Edition

2010-03-19

Order Information

Please specify when ordering this document:

Update information
TruTops CAD
Edition 2010-03-19
Document number U523EN

Address for orders

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG

Technische Redaktion
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
D-71254 Ditzingen
Fon: +49 7156 303 - 0
Fax: +49 7156 303 - 30540
Internet: http://www.trumpf.com
E-Mail: [email protected]

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG

Table of contents

U523EN

2010-03-19

Basics

1-1

1.1

Displaying overlapping contours

1-1

1.2

Reactivating disabled optional message

boxes

1-1

Opening and saving files

2-1

2.1

Loading a DXF/DWG file with automatic

preparation

2-1

2.2

Loading single DXF/DWG layouts

2-2

2.3

Opening bit maps (option)

2-2

2.4

Layout assistant - filling in parts according to

selection

2-4

2.5

Selecting material ID and raw material in the

drawing data

2-4

2.6

Resetting applications to their initial state

2-5

Inserting or modifying texts in geometries

3-1

3.1

Mirroring FNT texts

3-1

3.2

Changing FNT text to TTF text (and vice

versa)

3-1

3.3

Loading DXF, DWG and MI files with TTF

texts

3-2

3.4

Modifying TTF texts in Variants

3-2

3.5

Creating texts with curvature

3-3

Managing variants

4-1

4.1

Renumbering variants consecutively

4-1

Profile editor

5-1

5.1

Indication of the effective length

5-1

Bending lines

6-1

6.1

Inverting a bending

6-1

6.2

Restricting the bending tool selection

6-1

6.3

Defining the bending line mask

6-1

Table of contents

0-1

0-2

Table of contents

2010-03-19

U523EN

1.
NEW

Basics
Contours that overlap can be displayed and separated at the
intersecting points.
Permanently disabled message boxes can be displayed
again.

1.1

Displaying overlapping contours

Select >View, >Highlight overlapping contours.

The overlapping contours are displayed in cyan and all intersecting points as yellow squares. The contours are separated at the
intersecting points.

1.2

Reactivating disabled optional

message boxes

1. Select >Extras >Modify data....

2. Select >User >Configuration.
The "Configuration" mask is displayed.
3. Select "Show optional message boxes again" .
4. Select Modify.

U523EN

2010-03-19

Basics

1-1

1-2

Basics

2010-03-19

U523EN

2.
NEW

Opening and saving files

DXF/DWG files can be prepared automatically. TruTops CAD
attempts to recognize geometry offsets.
Single layouts can be loaded from a DXF file.
Bit maps and other file formats can be opened, vectorized
and then processed further and saved as *.GEO (option).
When several parts are selected with the layout assistant
(extract sheet), the selected parts are displayed filled in.
In the drawing data (>File, >Properties), the material ID as
well as the raw material for a part can be selected. This is
especially important for TruTops Bend applications. The processing then uses the correct material and the correct raw
material.
The applications CAD, Nest, Laser, Punch, Tube CAD and
Tube can be reset to their initial state at the touch of a button. Currently open files (e. g. drawings, nesting jobs, processed tubes) are closed, without the need to close and
reopen the application itself.

2.1

Loading a DXF/DWG file with

automatic preparation

The automatic preparation attempts to recognize collision contours such as drawing frames, dimensionings, approach flags
etc. The recognized part becomes white in color, and all other
parts become blue. Advantage: The geometry offset can be
easily removed via >Edit, >Delete, >Selection, "Blue" .
1. Select >File, >Open.
The file browser opens.
2. Under "File type" select DXF files or DWG files .
All DXF files or DWG files are displayed.
3. Select the desired file.
4. Select OK.
The "DXF/DWG loading options" mask is opened.
5. To prepare the DXF/DWG file automatically, select the "Prepare""automatic" checkbox.
Note
The preparation is now visible in the preview.
6. Select OK.
The DXF/DWG file is openedThe collision contours are displayed
in blue.

U523EN

2010-03-19

Opening and saving files

2-1

2.2

Loading single DXF/DWG layouts

Single layouts (different views/cutouts of the model) can be

stored in DXF and DWG files. These can be loaded individually
in TruTops CAD.
1. Select >File, >Open....
The file browser opens.
2. Select DXF or DWG file.
3. Select OK.
The "DXF/DWG loading options" mask is opened.
4. Select "Adopt only single layout".
A list of the available layouts is opened.
If there are no layouts in the selected file, a message
appears.
5. Select layout.
6. Select OK.
The layout is opened.

2.3

Opening bit maps (option)

Bit map files (BMP, JPG, PNG, GIF, TIF or PDF) can be
opened, vectorized and saved as *.GEO.
1. Select >File, >Open bit map...
The file browser opens.
2. Select "File type".
3. Select the desired file.
4. Select OK.
The "Grid loading options" mask is opened
5. Process drawing.
or
Select the desired vectorization parameter.
Button

Options

Comment

Start drawing program

The standard drawing program is opened

with the current drawing.The drawing can
be revised and saved. The modifications
are accepted.

Edit drawing

2-2

Opening and saving files

2010-03-19

U523EN

Button

Options

Comment

Select drawing program

The standard drawing program is defined.

Generate black/
white picture with
threshold value

A raster image is converted into a black/

white picture with threshold value. If the
"With threshold value" checkbox is selected,
the threshold value can be altered via a
controller.

Generate black/white picture

Only grayscale values above a certain

threshold value are observed (background
noise is suppressed).
Edit black/white picture
Thicken black/white
picture

Lines are thickened.

Thin black/white picture

Lines are drawn thinner.

Invert black/white
picture

Black and white areas in the picture are

exchanged.

Select a section
from black/white picture

Select a section of a picture.

Connection distance

Maximum permissible distance before a gap

is closed. By increasing this parameter, the
number of open contours can be reduced.

Filter length

Contours that are smaller than the filter

length are deleted. By increasing this
parameter, the number of unwanted small
contours can be reduced.

Accuracy

Maximum deviation of the contour from the

raster image. A high degree of accuracy
generally means that the generated contour
has more anchor points.

Center line

The program assumes that the contours are

drawn as lines. The vectorization attempts
to meet these lines in the center.

Contour

The program assumes that the drawing was

drawn or scanned as it stands. The vectorization attempts to meet the contours of the
drawing.

Width/height

Width and height can be altered.

Retain ratio

The ratio is maintained when alterations are

made to the width or height.

Set vectorization parameters

Set dimensions

Tab. 2-1

6. Select OK.
The drawing opens.

U523EN

2010-03-19

Opening and saving files

2-3

2.4

Layout assistant - filling in parts

according to selection

If several parts are selected via the layout assistant (extract

sheet), these are filled in gray.
1. Select >Assistants, >Layout, >Extract sheet, >Sheet box .
The "Extract sheet with parts" mask is opened.
2. Assign part name.
3. Select OK.
4. Box in parts that are to be extracted.
The parts are filled in gray.
5. Select OK.
The contours of the selected parts are displayed in red.
The selection can be saved.

2.5

Selecting material ID and raw material

in the drawing data

In addition to the material, the raw material can also be selected.

This material is then preset in TruTops Punch. TruTops Bend
does not have a sheet layout, i.e. the material and raw material
are not requested until a bend is created. This selection should
then be made in TruTops CAD, provided that the material is
available in the database. The advantage: This selected raw
material will be supported by TruTops Work and TruTops Unfold.
Selecting the material ID

1. Select >File, >Properties...

The "File information" mask is opened.
2. Select the material ID drop-down arrow.
The "Select material" mask is opened.
3. As an example, enter %AI% between the two percent signs
(below the list field, first list field: material ID, second list
field: stock ID)) .
The list field displays all entries that begin with these letters.
The material selection is thereby filtered and restricted.
Note
The selection can be limited even further using the filter field
"Z". For example, if <=3 is entered here, all materials with a
material thickness of 3 mm or less are displayed. >=3 displays all materials with a thickness of 3 mm or more.

2-4

Opening and saving files

2010-03-19

U523EN

4. Select material.
The material is adopted.
Selecting the raw material

5. Select the raw material drop-down arrow.

The "Selection" mask is opened.
Note
If the raw material does not match the material or vice versa,
the corresponding raw material or material is used automatically. If there is no corresponding material/raw material, the
relevant field remains empty and must be reselected.
6. Select raw material.
The raw material is adopted.

2.6

Resetting applications to their initial

state

Select >File >Close.

The application is "empty".

U523EN

2010-03-19

Opening and saving files

2-5

2-6

Opening and saving files

2010-03-19

U523EN

3.
NEW

Inserting or modifying texts in

geometries
TruTops CAD supports FNT fonts (TRUMPF custom fonts)
and TTF fonts. The TTF fonts are converted into lines and
arcs and given a special characteristic so that TruTops can
treat them as text. To achieve a greater coordination
between both font types, the following modifications were
implemented.
FNT fonts can be mirrored (marking from the bottom).
When modifying a text, an FNT font can be changed to a
TTF font and vice versa.
When loading DXF, DWG and MI files, the texts can also
be loaded with a TTF font.
In Variants, TTF fonts can be selected under "Modify
text".
Creating texts with curvature.

3.1

Mirroring FNT texts

FNT texts can be mirrored horizontally, vertically, centrally or

arbitrarily. Using >Mirror, >Horizontal as an example, the procedure is described here.
1. Select >Modify, >Mirror, >Horizontal.
2. Click on the point on the horizontal mirror line, through which
the text is to be mirrored.
3. Click on or frame text.
The text is mirrored.

3.2

Changing FNT text to TTF text (and

vice versa)

1. Select >Modify, >Elements, >Text.

2. Click on the text.
3. Select Select font.
The "Select font" mask is opened.
4. Select the desired font.
5. Select OK.
6. Select OK.
The text is modified.

U523EN

2010-03-19

Inserting or modifying texts in geometries

3-1

3.3

Loading DXF, DWG and MI files with

TTF texts

1. Select >File, >Open....

The PDM browser opens.
2. Select the DXF/DWG file.
3. Select OK.
The "DXF/DWG loading options" mask is opened.
4. Select "Transfer texts".
5. Select the font selection arrow.
The "Select font" mask is opened.
6. Under "File type" select TTF files.
All TTF fonts are displayed.
7. Select the desired fonts.
8. Select OK.
9. Select OK.
The DXF/DWG file is loaded with the selected TTF font.

3.4

Modifying TTF texts in Variants

1. Select >Variants, >Start .

The variant module is opened.
2. If variants have already been generated, select >Variants,
>Manage variants .
or
If no variants have been generated as yet, select >Variants, >Generate variants... .
Note
The following describes the procedural steps for a newly
generated variant.
3. Enter a designation for the variant.
4. Open the "Variant type" selection using the arrow.
5. Select Modify text.
6. Enter the new text in quotation marks, e. g "TruTops".
or
Enter a variable. These must be written in quotation
marks. It is possible to link variables to form long chains
out of several short ones.
7. Select OK.

3-2

Inserting or modifying texts in geometries

2010-03-19

U523EN

8. Click on the TTF text to be modified.

The new text is adopted.

3.5

Creating texts with curvature

1. Select >Create, >Special elements, >Text... .

The "Set text parameters" mask is opened.
2. Enter text.
3. Select the "Radius (clockwise)" check box.
4. To modify the rotational direction of the text, select the drop
down arrow.
The "Define type of round text" mask is opened.
5. Select the rotational direction.
6. Select OK.
7. Enter the radius.

Center

Left (center)

Right (center)

Reference point position

Fig. 57788

8. Select the reference point position.

9. Select OK.
The text is displayed on a curve.

U523EN

2010-03-19

Inserting or modifying texts in geometries

3-3

3-4

Inserting or modifying texts in geometries

2010-03-19

U523EN

4.
NEW

Managing variants
Variants can be renumbered consecutively.

4.1

Renumbering variants consecutively

1. Select >Variants, >Start .

The variant control is opened.
2. Select >Variants, >Manage variants.
The "Variants" mask showing the available variants is
opened.
3. Select New IDs to renumber the variant IDs consecutively.
The IDs are numbered consecutively from the top down.

U523EN

2010-03-19

Managing variants

4-1

4-2

Managing variants

2010-03-19

U523EN

5.
NEW

Profile editor
The effective length of a part is displayed in the title bar of
the profile table.
Faster calculation of the unfolding.

5.1

Indication of the effective length

When a profile is drawn in profile editor using the profile table,

the current effective length of the part is displayed in the mask
header of the profile table after each new element is added.

Mask header of the profile table

U523EN

2010-03-19

Fig. 55317

Profile editor

5-1

5-2

Indication of the effective length

2010-03-19

U523EN

6.
NEW

Bending lines
Bendings can be inverted, i. e. the bending direction is
reversed.
The >Unfold profile function is available once again (Menu
>Bend, >Bending, >Unfold...).
When selecting a bending tool, the selection can be restricted (it is possible to filter by material or list).
The "Define bending line" mask was modified.

6.1

Inverting a bending

1. Load bending part.

2. Select >Bend, >Bending, >Invert.
3. Click on the bending to be inverted.
The bending is inverted.

6.2

Restricting the bending tool selection

The facility for filtering by material can be switched off.

1. Select >Bend, >Bending, >Create....
2. To select a tool, select the drop down arrow.
The "Upper tools/lower tools" mask is opened.
3. Select the "Restrict selection" check box.
The "Filter selection" mask is opened.
4. Deselect the "Material" check box, if the selection is only to
be sorted by list.
5. Select OK.
6. Select a tool.
The tool is adopted.

6.3

Defining the bending line mask

The "Bending technique" option was removed.

In its place there is now a "Prebend/final bend" option. Consistent with the selected bending type, this will be automatically
applied or removed. Furthermore, the selection made under

U523EN

2010-03-19

Bending lines

6-1

bending method is now dependent on the bending type, i. e. only

sensible combinations are provided.

6-2

Defining the bending line mask

2010-03-19

U523EN